Samsung Cell Phone SGH I727_UM User Manual

4 G  
L T E  
S M A R T P H O N E  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
phone, and keep it for future reference.  
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS  
OR BENEFITS.  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,  
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.  
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC  
Headquarters:  
Customer Care Center:  
1000 Klein Rd.  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, TX 75082  
Toll Free Tel:  
Plano, TX 75074  
1.888.987.HELP (4357)  
©2011 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS  
System (Automated Response System) at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support  
Nuance®, VSuite, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,  
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are  
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.  
and  
are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license  
from SRS Labs, Inc.  
®
, DivX , DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under  
TM  
license.  
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX  
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX  
videos.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-  
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap Applications >  
Settings > About phone > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register).  
Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,  
Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make  
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is  
required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices  
or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.  
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be  
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available  
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other  
phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the  
terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be  
used and protected.  
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or  
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These  
controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.  
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to  
improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy  
.
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to hear and be  
heard™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your  
voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.  
How Does It Work?  
The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.  
Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise -  
from both ends of a call.  
It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.  
With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,  
without worrying about surrounding noise.  
Table of Contents  
1
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address  
Book ......................................................... 62  
2
3
Section 11: Health and Safety  
Information ............................................ 189  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification  
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
4
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO  
THIRD PARTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233  
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION  
WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234  
ACCURACY OF THE INFORMATION  
WE COLLECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235  
Section 13: Samsung Product  
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . 208  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
Registration ............................................241  
Index ...........................................................242  
5
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section explains how to start using your phone by first  
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then  
setting up your Voicemail.  
2. Lift the cover up and away from the phone (3).  
Setting Up Your Phone  
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM  
into their corresponding internal compartments. The  
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal  
area.  
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into  
the slot on the top side of your phone (1) and pulling up  
(2).  
Installing the SIM Card  
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided  
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,  
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many  
others features.  
6
         
Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts  
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,  
so be careful when handling, inserting, or  
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach  
of small children.  
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not  
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot  
if the SIM is not detected.  
Installing and Removing the Memory Card  
Your device lets you use a microSD(SD) or microSDHC  
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital  
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data  
between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory card  
is designed for use with this mobile phone and other devices.  
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket  
(as shown) until the card locks into place.  
Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone  
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned  
as shown.  
Note: Your phone has been tested to support up to a 32GB  
memory card.  
Incorrect  
1. Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as  
shown).  
Correct  
Getting Started  
7
           
Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and  
the card is securely inserted.  
Installing the Battery  
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the  
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).  
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).  
Incorrect  
Correct  
2. To remove, push on the memory card until it clicks and  
is released. Then grasp the memory card and remove it  
from the phone.  
For more information on Memory Cards, see “Memory Card”  
8
 
2. Press all along the edge of the back cover until you  
Installing the Back Cover  
1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)  
and press down (2).  
have a secure seal.  
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before  
switching on the phone.  
Charging a Battery  
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The  
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included  
with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and  
chargers.  
Getting Started  
9
     
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate  
mode, web browser use, and other variables may  
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.  
Although you can use the phone while the battery is  
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.  
Correct  
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your  
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges  
fully in approximately 4 hours.  
Incorrect  
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/  
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a  
standard AC wall outlet.  
Using the Travel Charger  
Important! Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to  
connection. If the battery is not properly installed  
and the wall charger is connected, the handset  
may power off and on continuously, preventing  
proper operation.  
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from  
the interface connector jack on the phone.  
Warning! If your handset has a touch screen display, please  
note that a touch screen responds best to a light  
touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive  
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch  
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and  
10  
 
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the  
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory.  
To change the language, use the Language menu. For  
battery, can cause damage to the phone.  
Low Battery Indicator  
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time  
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a  
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your  
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning  
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a  
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery  
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your  
device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.  
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold  
until  
the Phone options screen displays.  
4. Tap Power off, then tap OK to switch off the phone.  
Locking and Unlocking the Touch  
Screen  
1. Press  
to lock the touch screen.  
2. Press  
again to display the main screen then  
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone  
automatically turns off.  
sweep your finger across the screen to unlock it.  
Switching the Phone On or Off  
1. Press and hold  
(on the upper right side of the  
phone) until the phone switches on.  
2. Sweep your finger across the screen to unlock the  
phone.  
Getting Started  
11  
                 
Setting up your Phone with Ready2Go  
Creating a Samsung Account  
An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing  
applications such as AllShare. The account setup instructions  
below only need to be performed once.  
When you turn on your phone for the first time, you will be  
prompted to setup the AT&T Ready2Go feature.  
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your  
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up  
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure  
Wi-Fi and many more features.  
1. When the Fast & Easy Phone Set-Up screen displays,  
tap Select Language if you want to change the default  
language.  
1. From the home screen, touch and hold the Notification  
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down  
2. Tap  
Samsung account.  
2. Touch Get Started to begin.  
3. Tap Create new account  
.
– or –  
4. Tap Terms and conditions to read themand tap OK  
.
Touch Cancel to set up your phone later. You can  
5. Tap the I accept all the terms above checkbox.  
access Ready2Go by tapping Applications  
Ready2Go  
AT&T  
6. Tap Privacy policy and read the policy and tap OK  
7. Tap Agree  
8. Enter the required information and tap Sign up  
9. At the Samsung account screen, tap Go to Mailbox  
.
.
.
3. Read and follow the instructions on each screen.  
.
.
12  
       
10. At the Email screen, follow the on-screen instructions  
to sign onto the email account that you entered  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create Google  
Account.  
Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to  
sign in.  
11. Open the Activate your account E-mail that was sent to  
Resetting your Google Account  
Password  
A Google account password is required for Google  
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account  
password, follow these instructions to reset it:  
you and tap the link to verify your account.  
12. At the Account Verification screen, tap Confirm  
13. At the Samsung account screen, enter your E-mail and  
Password and tap Sign in  
.
.
Creating a New Google Account  
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser to  
navigate to http://google.com/accounts  
.
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will  
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your  
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will  
always be in sync between your phone and computer.  
2. Once the URL loads, click on the Can’t access your  
account? link.  
3. Enter your Email address and click Submit  
.
After you start your phone for the first time, follow these  
steps:  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to reset your  
password.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Applications  
Gmail  
.
The Add a Google Account screen displays.  
2. Tap New to continue.  
Getting Started  
13  
     
9. The Add a Home screen shortcut checkbox is checked  
by default and will add a Visual Voicemail shortcut to  
your Home screen. Tap again to uncheck if you do not  
want a shortcut.  
Setting Up Visual Voicemail  
AT&T Visual Voicemail provides an email-like inbox that lets  
you listen to voicemail messages in any order that you  
choose. For more information, visit http://www.att.com/myatt  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Visual Voicemail  
10. Tap Finish.  
.
The Visual Voicemail screen is displayed.  
The Account Setup screen is displayed.  
2. Tap Call Voicemail  
Note: These steps may be different depending on your  
.
network.  
3. Follow the tutorial to setup your language, create a  
password, select a greeting, and record your name.  
Accessing Your Voicemail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
4. when you are finished, tap to disconnect.  
*
Visual Voicemail  
The AT&T Visual Voicemail Welcome screen displays.  
.
The Visual Voicemail screen is displayed.  
5. Tap What is Visual Voicemail? to read more about this  
feature.  
2. Tap the voicemail that you would like to view or listen  
6. Tap Set password  
7. Enter the password that you initially setup in step 3 and  
tap Continue  
.
to.  
– or –  
.
Tap Autoplay to hear all of your voicemails.  
8. Tap Setup a personal greeting if you did not do this  
3. Tap Call Back to call the number that left the voicemail,  
previously.  
or tap Delete to delete the voicemail.  
14  
           
4. Touch and drag the slider to fast-forward or reverse the  
• Export to file: exports the voicemail to your Music folder in  
.amr format.  
voicemail playback.  
• Add to contacts: adds the number that left the voicemail to  
your contacts.  
Previous  
Voicemail  
Next  
Voicemail  
• Copy message text: allows you to copy text message if you  
have the transcription feature.  
6. From the Visual Voicemail screen press  
to access  
Play/Pause  
External Speaker/  
Speakerphone  
the following options:  
• Autoplay: allows you to hear all of your voicemails in  
sequence.  
Touch and drag to  
fast-forward or  
reverse  
• Refresh: refreshes the screen.  
• Settings: allows you to modify voicemail settings. For more  
5. After selecting a voicemail, press  
to access the  
• Delete all: deletes all voicemail messages.  
following options:  
• Send text: allows you to send a text message to the number  
that left the voicemail.  
Visual Voicemail Settings  
To access Visual Voicemail Settings, from the Home  
screen, tap Visual Voicemail  
Settings  
• Share: allows you to share the voicemail via Bluetooth, Email,  
Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
.
• Save: saves the voicemail.  
• Voicemail greeting: allows you to set or change your voicemail  
greeting type.  
Getting Started  
15  
 
• Auto-save messages: allows you to save a local copy of newly  
received voicemail messages.  
Android System Recovery  
Android System Recovery is used for Google updates but the  
average user will never need to perform a system recovery.  
• Change password: allows you to change your Visual Voicemail  
password.  
Note: If you entered this menu by mistake, use the Volume Up/  
Down keys to select reboot system now, then press the  
Power key. Your phone will then continue to boot up.  
• Check for updates: automatically check for application  
updates in the Android Market.  
• Notifications: displays voicemail notifications in the status bar.  
• Vibrate: allows you to be notified of new voicemail by turning  
on vibration. Select Always, Only when silent, or Never.  
• Application version: displays the version of the Visual  
Voicemail application.  
To enter the Android System Recovery mode, follow these  
steps:  
1. With the phone turned off, press the Power key and  
Volume Up/Down keys at the same time until the phone  
switches on.  
Accessing Your Voicemail From Another Phone  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
2. Once the Samsung logo appears, release the Power  
key while continuing to press the Volume Up/Down  
keys.  
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the  
asterisk key on the phone you are using.  
3. Enter your passcode.  
3. Continue to press the Volume Up/Down keys for at  
least 8 seconds, until Recovery mode is launched and  
the Android System Recovery screen is displayed.  
4. Release the Volume Up/Down keys.  
16  
       
5. The following options are available:  
2. Press and hold the power key (  
) to boot up your  
• reboot system now: this option turns on your phone.  
• apply update from external storage: this option allows you to  
apply updates from your memory card to your phone.  
• wipe data/factory reset: deletes all data from the phone  
except pictures and videos. For more information, refer to  
device.  
3. After the start-up animation begins to display, rapidly  
tap the key until the Lock screen displays.  
When the Lock screen is displayed, Safe mode is  
displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.  
Troubleshooting  
If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may  
need to reset the device to regain functionality.  
• wipe cache partition: allows you to delete all cache data such  
as log files.  
• apply update from cache: allows you to update your phone’s  
software once it has been placed in the cache after you have  
performed a Software update from the Settings menu.  
6. Use the Volume Up/Down keys to scroll up or down,  
If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and  
hold the Power/Lock Key for 8 to 10 seconds.  
then press the power key (  
selection.  
) to make a  
Safe Mode  
You can boot your phone into Safe Mode if you wish to  
troubleshoot whether or not added applications are causing  
problems with the device. Safe mode will only load basic  
system software.  
1. Make sure your phone is turned off.  
Getting Started  
17  
     
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone  
This section outlines some key features of your phone and  
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone  
is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and  
provides information on using a memory card.  
Mobile Hotspot Capability  
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation  
HSDPA 7.2 mbps high speed download capability  
16 GB built-in memory (on-board)  
Features of Your Phone  
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many  
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the  
features included in your phone.  
Up to 32 GB expandable memory slot  
Corporate and Personal Email  
Sync and update social network applications  
Over 250,000 Apps available to download from the Play Store™  
4G LTE network with 1.5 gigahertz dual core processor  
Android v 4.0.4, Ice Cream Sandwich Platform  
Access to Movies and TV Shows with Samsung Media Hub  
Google Video Chat via Google Talk  
Touch screen provides quick response to a variety of in-phone menus  
and options including applications and seven home screens  
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube, Google  
Maps, Google Voice Search)  
Virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard  
Ready access to the Internet  
Visual Voicemail  
®
HD Video Player 720p  
Built-in Bluetooth and advanced Wi-Fi technology  
®
®
DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including  
premium content  
Brilliant 4.8” HD SuperAMOLED display  
8 Megapixel camera and camcorder with 2 Megapixel Front Facing  
camera  
AllShare™ to share your media content across DLNA certified devices  
USB Tethering-capable  
18  
       
1. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of  
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to  
Self shot.  
Front View of Your Phone  
1
2
13  
2. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light  
level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is  
blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to  
your ear, the touch screen will turn off. Also used for  
some Camera settings.  
12  
11  
10  
3. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your  
favorite applications on the Home screen.  
4. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important  
features such as Phone, Email, Web, and Applications.  
3
4
9
5. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with  
additional options for different features and  
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,  
Messaging, and Web.  
8
5
6
7
Understanding Your Phone  
19  
     
6. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home  
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold  
to display your recently used applications and a  
shortcut to the Task manager.  
Side Views of Your Phone  
6
1
7. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating  
a menu or web page.  
5
8. Search key: allows you to access the Google Search  
feature where you can search for items on the internet.  
9. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is  
presently displayed.  
2
10. Home screen tips Widget: displays tips to using your  
home screen. Tap the text area to see 6 different tips.  
11. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search  
that allows you to search for items on the internet.  
12. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to  
operate your phone, such as the received signal  
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,  
missed calls, etc.  
13. External speaker: allows you to hear the caller.  
3
4
20  
     
1. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones.  
2. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume  
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume  
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly  
Rear View of Your Phone  
1
3
press down either volume key (  
the ring tone.  
) to mute  
3. Microphone: allows other callers to hear you when you  
are speaking to them. This microphone is also used  
when you are using voice related applications.  
4. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to  
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories  
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for  
convenient, hands-free conversations.  
2
5. Power/Lock key: (  
) lets you power your phone  
1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.  
2. External speaker: allows you to hear when the  
Speakerphone is turned on.  
on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the touch  
screen. For more information on locking your phone,  
6. Microphone: allows other callers to hear you when you  
are using the speakerphone.  
3. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking  
pictures in dark places.  
Understanding Your Phone  
21  
     
Indicator Icons  
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s  
display and Indicator area.  
Display Layout  
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about  
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access  
Note: In-call indicator icons display in the notification bar only  
when you close the main call screen during the active  
call.  
Primary Shortcuts  
There are four non-movable Application Shortcuts that  
appear at the bottom of all Home screens. The default  
shortcuts are:  
Displays your current signal strength. The greater  
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.  
Phone  
Email  
Web  
for dialing a number.  
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You  
cannot send or receive any calls or access online  
information.  
for sending and receiving email messages.  
for surfing the Internet.  
Applications  
for accessing the applications on your phone.  
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.  
While viewing the Applications Menu, the Application  
shortcut changes to Home , which returns you to the Main  
screen.  
DisplayswhenthecontentsofthemicroSDcardare  
being scanned.  
You can change the Phone, Email, and Web application  
shortcuts to any icon that is displayed in the Applications  
menu.  
Displays when the External SD card is being  
prepared for mounting to the device. This is  
required for communication with the External SD  
card.  
22  
       
Displays when there is no network available.  
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always  
Displays when there is a system error or alert. Also  
displays when the SD card has been improperly  
removed.  
Displays when you phone is set to automatically  
reject all calls.  
Displays when a call is in progress and you exit the  
call screen.  
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is  
fully charged.  
Displays when a call is on hold and you exit the call  
screen.  
Displays when your battery is charging. Also  
displays battery charge level.  
Displayswhenthespeakerphoneisonandyouexit  
the call screen.  
DevicePowerCriticalShowsyourcurrentbattery  
only has three percent power remaining and will  
immediately shutdown.  
Displays when an active call is routed through a  
Bluetooth headset. Displayed in the Status bar  
when the current call is minimized.  
DisplayswhenyourconnectiontoanEDGEnetwork  
is active.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the EDGE network.  
Displays when a call has been missed.  
Displayswhenyourconnection to a UTMS, HSDPA,  
HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.  
Displays when a call has been muted.  
Understanding Your Phone  
23  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.  
Displays when a new text or multimedia message  
is received.  
Displays when a new Voicemail is received.  
Displayswhenyourconnectiontoa4GLTEnetwork  
is active.  
Displays when Email is received.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the 4G LTE network.  
Displays as a reminder to configure your phone  
using the AT&T Ready2Go application or to setup  
your Google Account.  
Displays when your phone is downloading or has  
downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is  
installing.  
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in  
progress.  
DisplayswhenthetimeanddateforaCalendarEvent  
DisplayswhenaMarketdownloadhassuccessfully  
been installed.  
Displayswhenyousetanalarmtoringataspecified  
Displays when updates are available for download.  
Displays when Silent mode is set to Mute.  
Displays when the phone is connected to a  
computer via a supported USB cable connection.  
Displays when Silent mode is set to Vibrate.  
Displays when the phone is tethered via a  
supported USB cable connection.  
24  
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.  
Displays when your phone as been configured as a  
portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired  
with the phone.  
DisplayswhenGPSis active and acquiring asignal.  
Displays when Bluetooth is on but is not connected  
to a Bluetooth device.  
Displays when Power saving mode is enabled.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.  
Displays when the keypad is active.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a  
communication issue with the target Wireless  
Access Point (WAP).  
Displays when you have not yet set up a Samsung  
Account.  
DisplayswhenWi-FiDirectisactiveandyourphone  
is connected to another device.  
Displays when an emergency call is taking place.  
Displays when your phone is connected to a PC  
using Kies air.  
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see  
Displayswhen your phone is connectedto a Digital  
Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified device  
using the AllShare application.  
Understanding Your Phone  
25  
Application Icons  
The Application menu provides quick access to the items you  
use most frequently.  
Amazon Kindle: This application allows you to  
downloadbooks, magazines, andnewspaperstoread  
The following table contains a description of each  
application. If the application is already described in another  
section of this user manual, then a cross reference to that  
particular section is provided.  
AT&T Code Scanner: AT&T Code Scanner allows you to  
scan 2D (QR and datamatrix codes) and 1D (UPC and  
EAN)barcodesfoundinmagazines,stores,andonline.  
For information on navigating through the Applications icons,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
, then tap one of the  
AT&T FamilyMap:providespeaceofmindbybeingable  
to conveniently locate a family member from your  
wireless phone or PC and know that your family's  
location information is secure and private. For more  
application icons.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
3. To return to the Home screen, tap  
The following applications are available:  
.
AT&T Navigator: AT&T Navigator provides you with  
access to real-time GPS-driven applications. These  
programs not only allow you to achieve turn-by-turn  
navigation, but also access local searches based on a  
variety of category parameters. For more information,  
AllShare:AllShareallowsyourphonetostreamphotos,  
music and videos from its memory to other Digital  
Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified devices. Your  
phone can also play digital content streamed from  
26  
 
AT&T Ready2Go:AT&TReady2Go allows you to quickly  
and easily setup your phone by using the web browser  
on your PC. You can set-up email accounts, import  
contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-Fi and many  
Camera: Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to  
produce photos in a JPEG format. For more  
Clock: The Clock application allows you to access  
alarms, view the World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a  
timer, and setup a Desk Clock. For more information,  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi: With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can  
maximize your battery performance, maximize your  
data, simplify access to AT&T Hot Spots and Wi-Fi  
networks, automate your Wi-Fi connections, and  
Contacts: You can manage your daily contacts by  
storing their name and number in your Address Book.  
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or  
Calculator:Usingthisfeatureyoucanusethephoneas  
a calculator. The calculator provides the basic  
arithmetic functions; addition, subtraction,  
multiplication, and division. You can also use this as a  
Downloads: The Downloads application allows you to  
manageallofyourdownloadsfromtheMarketandthe  
Facebook: Facebook enables you to go directly to your  
Facebook account without accessing it through your  
Calendar: With the Calendar feature, you can consult  
the calendar by day, week, or month, create events,  
and set an alarm to actasa reminder, ifnecessary. For  
Understanding Your Phone  
27  
     
Gallery: The Gallery is where you view photos and play  
back videos. For photos, you can also perform basic  
editing tasks, view a slideshow, set photos as  
wallpaper or contact image, and share as a picture  
IM: Instant Messaging allows you to send and receive  
instant messages using Windows Live Messenger,  
Google Talk, or Yahoo! Messenger communities. For  
Kies air: Kies Air allows you to sync your Windows PC  
wirelessly with your phone provided they are both on  
thesameWi-Finetwork.Youcanviewcalllogs,videos,  
photos, bookmarks, IMs, and even send SMS  
messages from your home computer. For more  
Gmail: Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is  
configured when you first set up your phone.  
Depending on your synchronization settings, Gmail  
can automatically synchronize with your Gmail  
Latitude:WithGoogleLatitude,youcanseethelocation  
of all of your friends on a map or on a list. You can also  
shareorhideyourlocation.Formoreinformation,refer  
Google+:Google+makesmessagingandsharingwith  
your friends a lot easier. You can set up Circles of  
friends, visit the Stream to get updates from your  
Circles, use Messenger for fast messaging with  
everyone in your Circles, or use Instant Upload to  
automatically upload videos and photos to your own  
LiveTV:LiveTVisasubscriptionservicethatallowsyou  
to watch your favorite TV shows using your handset.  
28  
 
Maps:Dependingonyourlocation,youcanviewbasic,  
custom, and satellite maps and local business  
information, including locations, contact information,  
and driving directions. You can also post public  
messages about a location and track your friends. For  
Mini diary: The Mini diary allows you to keep a diary of  
your daily activities and also attach pictures. You can  
publish your diary entries to Facebook and MySpace.  
MOG Music: MOG Music gives you access to over 11  
million songs and provides unlimited listening and  
unlimited downloads. For more information, refer to  
MediaHub:SamsungMediaHubisyouronestopforthe  
hottestmovieandTVcontent.Youcanrentorpurchase  
your favorite content and watch from the convenience  
Movies: The Movies application allows you to rent  
movies to watch on your phone. For more information,  
Memo: This feature allows you to create a memo. For  
Music player: Music allows you to play music files that  
you have stored on your phone and memory card. You  
canalsocreateplaylists.Formoreinformation,referto  
Messaging:Youcansendandreceivedifferenttypesof  
My files: My files allows you to manage your sounds,  
images,videos,bluetoothfiles,Androidfiles,andother  
memorycarddatainoneconvenientlocation.Formore  
Messenger: Messenger allows you to bring groups of  
friends together into a simple group conversation.  
When you get a new conversation in Messenger,  
Google+ sends an update to your phone. For more  
Understanding Your Phone  
29  
   
myAT&T:MyAT&TallowsyoutomanageyourownAT&T  
account. You can review and pay your bill, check  
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or  
Photo editor: The Photo editor application provides  
basic editing functions for pictures that you take on  
your phone. Along with basic image tuning like  
brightness, contrast, and color it also provides a wide  
variety ofeffects used for editing the picture. For more  
Navigation: Navigation is an internet-connected GPS  
navigationsystemwithvoiceguidance.Youcantypeor  
Places:PlacesisanapplicationthatusesGoogleMaps  
and your location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes,  
Bars, Attractions, and more. For more information,  
News & Weather: Displays current news and weather  
Now is the time for all good  
men to come to the aid of their  
country. The quick brown fox  
jumps over the lazy dog.  
Play Books: With Google Books, you can find more  
than 3 million free e-books and hundreds of  
thousands more to buy in the eBookstore. For more  
NFS Shift: NFS (Need for Speed) Shift is a high  
performanceracinggame. Youcanusemanydifferent  
tracks in international locations with day and night  
PlayMovies:TheGoogleMoviesapplicationallowsyou  
to rent movies to watch on your phone. For more  
30  
Play Music: With the Google Music application, while  
online, youcanplaymusicthatyouhaveaddedtoyour  
music file as well as any music you copied from your  
PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have  
Search: The GoogleSearch applicationis the sameon-  
screen Internet search engine that is on the Google  
Search Bar on your main Home screen. For more  
information, refer to “Google Search Bar” on page 33.  
Settings: This icon navigates to the sound and phone  
settings for your phone. It includes such settings as:  
display, security, memory, and any extra settings  
associated with your phone. For more information,  
Play Store: The Google Play Store provides access to  
downloadable applications and games to install on  
Social Hub: With Social Hub, you can now easily and  
intuitively satisfy all of your relevant communication  
needs from one integrated user experience. E-mails,  
instant messaging, social network contents, and  
calendar contents from all major service providers are  
Qik Lite: Allowsyoutorecordandshare live videofrom  
your device with your friends, family and your favorite  
LITE  
Quickoffice: The Quickoffice application allows you to  
createandsaveMicrosoftWordandExceldocuments.  
You can also view existing Powerpoint presentations  
Talk: Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based  
application for instant messaging offered by Google.  
Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats  
area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search  
a chat log and store them in your Gmail accounts. For  
Understanding Your Phone  
31  
 
Task: The Task application allows you to keep track of  
tasks that you have. You can also sync them with  
Voice command: With the Voice command application  
you can use your voice to perform operations that you  
would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a  
phone number, texting a message, playing music, etc.  
Taskmanager:TheTaskmanagerapplicationprovides  
information about the processes and programs  
running on your phone, as well as the memory status.  
It can also be used to terminate processes and  
Voicerecorder:TheVoicerecorderallowsyoutorecord  
an audio file up to one minute long and then  
immediately send it as a message. For more  
Video player: The Video application plays video files  
stored on your microSD card. For more information,  
Voice talk: With the Voice talk application you can use  
your voice to perform operations that you would  
normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone  
number, texting a message, playing music, etc. For  
Visual Voicemail: AT&T Visual Voicemail provides an  
email-like inbox that lets you listen to voicemail  
messages in any order that you choose. For more  
YouTube: YouTube is a video sharing website on which  
users can upload and share videos, and view them in  
32  
     
Menu Navigation  
YP: The YP (Yellowpages) application provides quick  
and ready access to businesses, map locations, and  
storage of your favorite searches. This application  
allows you to tap into local businesses, locations, and  
events, connecting you to your search in real-time.  
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs  
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and  
features can be accessed by scrolling through the available  
on-screen menus. Your phone originally has seven home  
screens.  
Command Keys  
Menu Key  
Press  
options for the current screen or feature.  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to the Home screen or to the folders you  
Menu to display a context-sensitive menu of  
Home Key  
Press  
Home to display the Home screen. Press and hold  
Google Search Bar  
to display your recently used applications and a shortcut to  
the Task manager.  
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet  
search engine powered by Google™.  
1. From the main home screen, tap the Google Search bar  
.
Back Key  
Press  
step.  
Back to return to the previous screen, option or  
Search Key  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want  
Press  
your phone.  
Search to launch Quick Search, to search the web and  
to search for, then tap  
3. Tap to use Google Voice Search. For more  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
33  
               
Pan  
Terms used in this user manual  
Tap  
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:  
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device  
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must  
first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:  
Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.  
Tap a menu item to select it.  
Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to  
another page.  
Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.  
Touch and Hold  
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For  
example:  
Tilt  
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the  
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or  
enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:  
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.  
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.  
Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.  
Sweep  
Locking and Unlocking the Phone  
To unlock your phone:  
To sweep, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally  
across the screen. Use sweep when:  
Unlocking the screen  
1. Press the lock button  
located on the upper  
Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu  
right side of your phone.  
34  
     
2. Sweep the touch screen in any direction.  
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with  
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen  
is located in the middle with three Home screens on  
each side.  
3. The Home screen will display as shown above.  
Home Screen Overview  
The main home screen is the starting point for many  
applications and functions, and it allows you to add items  
like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets  
to give you instant access to information and applications.  
This is the default page and accessible from any menu by  
Navigating Through the Application Menus  
Your phone initially has four Application Menus available.  
Follow these steps to navigate through the Application  
Menus:  
pressing  
.
1. At the Home screen, tap  
. The first Application  
Navigating Through the Home Screens  
Menu will be displayed.  
Your phone initially has seven home screens. If you like, you  
can place different applications on each of the home  
screens.  
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other three  
menus.  
Understanding Your Phone  
35  
 
3. Tap one of the application icons.  
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone  
screen.  
2. Tap an option.  
Sub-Menu items  
Note: As you add applications, the number of Application  
menus that you have available will increase.  
Navigating Using Sub-Menus  
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen  
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,  
Contacts, Messaging, or Web.  
Accessing Recently-Used Applications  
1. Press and hold  
from any screen to open the  
recently-used applications window.  
To access a sub-menu:  
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.  
1. Press  
.
36  
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired  
application.  
Customizing Your Home Screen  
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:  
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an  
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the  
Applications tab.  
Creating Shortcuts  
Adding and Removing Widgets on the Home Screen  
Repositioning Widgets  
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the  
current page. Once complete, release the screen to  
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the  
current screen.  
Creating Folders  
Changing the Wallpaper  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
Creating Shortcuts  
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen  
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a  
feature, action, or launch an application.  
Adding a shortcut via the Add to home screen  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.  
3. From the Add to home window, tap Shortcuts  
.
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must  
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the  
new screen, then add the shortcut.  
4. Tap a shortcut from the available list.  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to add the new  
shortcut to your current Home screen.  
Deleting a shortcut  
Adding a shortcut from the Applications Menu  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
1. Press  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
3. Tap to display your current applications.  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it  
from its location on the current screen.  
3. Drag the icon over the Delete tab  
and release it.  
Understanding Your Phone  
37  
   
As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items  
turn red.  
8. Touch and hold the on-screen icon, then drag it over  
the primary shortcut that you want to replace. The new  
primary shortcut then appears at the bottom of the  
screen. The old primary shortcut will return to the  
menu.  
Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes  
it from the current screen.  
9. Press  
and tap Save  
.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts  
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the  
10. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home  
screens.  
exception of the Applications  
and Home  
shortcuts.  
1. Press  
2. Tap  
to activate the main Home screen.  
to display your current applications.  
Note: When a primary shortcut is removed, it will then appear  
3. Press  
and tap View type.  
as an option in the Application menu.  
4. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle will appear next  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
to the option.  
5. Press  
and tap Edit  
.
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either  
your Applications tab or on the main or extended Home  
screens. Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-  
screen application.  
The Edit applications screen is displayed.  
6. Tap OK  
.
7. Scroll through the list and locate your desired  
Note: To move a Widget from one screen to another, it must  
first be deleted from its current screen. Activate the new  
screen, then add the Widget.  
application.  
38  
   
Adding a Widget  
3. Press  
and tap View type.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
4. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle will appear next  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
to the option.  
5. Press  
and tap Edit.  
4. From the Add to home window, tap Widgets  
.
6. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to  
move.  
5. Scroll through the available Widgets at the bottom of  
the screen, then tap it to place it on your current  
screen.  
7. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.  
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge  
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.  
Removing a Widget  
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around  
8. Press  
and tap Save  
.
on the screen.  
9. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
2. Drag the Widget over the Delete tab  
and release it.  
Deleting Icons from the Applications Menu  
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn  
red.  
1. Press  
2. Tap  
to activate the Home screen.  
to display your current applications.  
3. Press  
and tap Edit.  
Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just  
4. Tap an application that you would like to delete from  
removes it from the current Home screen.  
the Applications menu. It must have a  
to it in order to delete it.  
symbol next  
Moving Icons in the Applications Menu  
5. Tap the icon.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
6. At the Delete prompt, tap Yes  
.
2. Tap  
to display your current applications.  
The application is deleted.  
Understanding Your Phone  
39  
Changing the Wallpaper  
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home  
screens by following these steps:  
Note: If you would like to get an application that you have  
previously deleted, use the Play Store to download it. For  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
2. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
Creating and Managing Folders  
Folders are located on any of the seven available Home  
screens and can contain both files (such as data and images)  
and Contact information or entries.  
3. From the Add to home window, tap Wallpapers  
.
4. Tap one of the following options:  
• Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken  
with your camera.  
To create a folder on-screen follow these steps:  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
• Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper.  
• Wallpaper gallery: select from many still-life wallpapers.  
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.  
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.  
5. Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper or Save  
.
4. From the Add to home window, tap Folders  
.
Moving Home Screens  
Your phone comes with seven Home screens. You can  
arrange the screens in any order that you want.  
5. Tap an available folder type to place it on your current  
screen.  
Choices include New folder, All contacts, Contacts with phone  
numbers, Received list from Bluetooth, and Starred contacts.  
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
and tap Edit  
2. Press  
.
Note: Starred contacts are those Contact entries tagged as  
very important.  
40  
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.  
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.  
5. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
In the following example, the second Home screen is  
moved to the last position.  
Adding and Deleting Home Screens  
You can delete Home screens and then add Home screens  
later if you want.  
When you move a Home screen, the other Home  
screens will be re-ordered automatically.  
To delete a Home screen, follow these steps:  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
and tap Edit  
2. Press  
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.  
Understanding Your Phone  
41  
4. Drag it to the trash can located at the bottom of the  
To add a Home screen, follow these steps:  
screen.  
1. Press  
to activate the Home screen.  
and tap Edit  
2. Press  
.
3. Touch and hold the Home screen that contains  
and  
drag it to the new location.  
5. If there are items on the Home screen that you want to  
delete, the Home screen has items. Delete? prompt is  
displayed.  
6. Tap Yes to remove the page, otherwise, tap No  
.
7. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
Note: The  
icon will only be displayed if a Home screen has  
previously been deleted.  
42  
4. Press  
to return to the main Home screen.  
Clearing Notifications  
You can now add items to your new Home screen.  
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:  
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification  
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down  
vertically.  
Notification Bar  
The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show  
information about processes that are running, recent  
notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator:  
On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification  
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down  
vertically.  
Clear Button  
2. Tap the Clear button.  
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.  
Understanding Your Phone  
43  
   
SD Card Overview  
After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your  
computer to access and manage the SD card.  
Memory Card  
Your device lets you use a microSD(SD) or microSDHC  
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital  
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data  
between  
Important! If access to the external SD card is not available,  
download and install the USB drivers.  
SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the features  
and options of your device’s SD functionality. The device has  
a USB SD card mode.  
Mounting the SD Card  
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You  
must mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the  
SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer.  
Using the SD Card  
There are several methods for using the SD card:  
1. Connecting to your PC to store files (such as music,  
videos, or other types of files and media).  
Important! You must disable USB storage to mount the SD  
card.  
2. To activate the camera, video, music player, and other  
dependant media or applications.  
1. Insert the SD card into the external, SD card slot. For  
Important! The Camera, Audio Postcard, Music Player, and  
Video functionality is all dependant on a mounted SD  
card. Your device can support SDHC cards up to  
32GB capacity.  
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available  
information on it.  
44  
           
2. Tap Format SD card  
3. At the Format SD card confirmation prompt, tap Format  
SD card  
.
Unmounting the SD card  
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to  
the SD card while removing it from the slot.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Storage  
2. Tap Unmount SD card  
3. Tap OK  
Settings  
Warning! Performing the next step erases all data stored on  
.
the SD card.  
.
.
4. Tap Delete all to format or press  
to cancel.  
SD card Available Memory Status  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Storage  
Settings  
.
2. The available memory displays under the Total space  
and Available headings.  
Erasing Files from the SD card  
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.  
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted. For more information,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Storage  
Settings  
.
Understanding Your Phone  
45  
Section 3: Call Functions  
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also  
includes the features and functionality associated with  
making or answering a call.  
Making an International Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
. The + character appears.  
, then touch and hold  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,  
Displaying Your Phone Number  
area code, and phone number.  
If you make a mistake, tap  
been deleted.  
until the desired numbers have  
Tap  
Settings  
About phone  
Status. Your  
phone number is displayed in the My phone number  
field.  
3. Tap  
to make the call.  
Making a Call  
Manual Pause Dialing  
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in  
your Contacts list:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the on-screen  
2. Tap  
to make the call.  
keypad to enter the phone number.  
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call  
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times  
when the person does not answer the call or is already  
2. Press  
to display the dialer sub-menu.  
3. Tap Add 3-sec pause to add a three second pause, and  
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.  
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by  
entering multiple 3 second pauses.  
46  
               
4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the  
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a  
key.  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page, then  
tap  
to make a call.  
5. Tap  
to make the call.  
Making a Call Using Speed Dial  
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your  
Contacts List for speed dialing.  
Correcting an Entered Number  
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when  
dialing.  
1. Tap  
to display your Contacts List.  
to display the Contacts List sub-menu.  
Speed dial setting  
2. Press  
3. Tap More  
.
After entering a number using the keypad:  
4. The Speed dial setting screen displays showing the  
numbers 2 through 9. The number 1 is reserved for  
Voicemail.  
If you make a mistake, tap  
to erase a single character.  
Press and hold to erase the entire string of numbers.  
Ending a Call  
Tap the  
5. Tap an unused number and the Contacts screen  
displays.  
key.  
6. Select a contact to assign to the number. The selected  
contact number will display in the speed dial number  
box.  
Dialing a Recent Number  
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the  
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address  
Book, the associated name also displayed.  
7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,  
press  
to display the Speed Dial sub-menu.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Call log  
.
8. Tap Change order or Remove  
.
.
Call log  
Call Functions  
47  
         
9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap  
Keypad  
I am in class now. I will call you back.  
I am in meeting. I will call you back.  
Sorry, I am busy. Call back later.  
and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial  
number.  
Making a Call from the Address Book  
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the  
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are  
collectively called the Address Book.  
– or –  
Tap Create new message to compose a new message.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
Answering a Call  
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the  
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address  
Book.  
1. At the incoming call screen:  
Touch and drag  
Touch and drag  
in any direction to answer the call.  
in any direction to reject the call and  
send it to your voicemail.  
Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and  
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.  
I am driving. I will call you back.  
2. Tap  
to end the call.  
I am at the cinema. I will call you back.  
48  
       
Call Log  
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or  
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone  
returns to the previously active function screen.  
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the  
details of the call.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Call log  
.
Dialing Options  
.
Call log  
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the  
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping  
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller  
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is  
displayed.  
Keypad. From the main Contacts page or from the  
Dialer, the following tabs are located at the top of your  
screen:  
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls  
are identified by the following icons:  
Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen  
keypad.  
Incoming Calls  
Outgoing Calls  
Missed Calls  
Rejected Calls  
Auto Rejected Calls  
:
Call log: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.  
Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as  
Favorites. Also displays frequently called numbers.  
Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a  
contact to call.  
:
:
:
After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to Contacts option  
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.  
:
Call Functions  
49  
     
2. The Call log is displayed. Missed calls are identified by  
Viewing Missed Calls from the Home Screen  
The number of calls you have missed is displayed on the  
the  
icon next to the number  
.
Home screen.  
Calling Back a Missed Call  
To call back a missed call number:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
1. Tap the missed call icon with the number of missed  
calls on it and move it in any direction.  
Call log  
.
Call log  
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller  
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is  
displayed.  
2. Tap the desired missed call. The call detail page is  
displayed.  
3. Tap  
.
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call log  
.
Call log  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.  
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap Create Contact to  
add the call to your Address Book.  
Note: If there is a voicemail sent by the same number,  
associated icons are displayed and can then be  
selected.  
The Create contact screen is displayed.  
– or –  
50  
       
If you want to replace the number for an existing  
contact, tap Update existing  
Sending a Message to a Recent Call  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call log  
.
Call log  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
2. Tap the call you want to send a message to.  
3. Tap  
.
4. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and  
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.  
5. When you are done with your message, tap Send.  
Add as new  
contact  
Update an existing  
contact  
Call the number  
Send a message  
Deleting a Call from the Call Log  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call log  
.
Call log  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
4. Enter information into the various fields using the  
keypad.  
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call  
log.  
5. Tap Save when you are finished.  
3. Tap Delete.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
The call is deleted from the Call log.  
Call Functions  
51  
5. You may reset these times to zero by pressing  
then tapping Reset  
Adding a Call to the Reject List  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call log  
.
Call log  
A list of recent calls is displayed.  
Options During a Call  
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you  
can use during a call.  
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject  
List.  
Adjusting the Call Volume  
3. Tap Add to reject list.  
During a call, to adjust the earpiece volume, use the Volume  
keys on the left side of the phone.  
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent  
to your voicemail.  
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level  
and press the Down volume key to decrease the  
volume level.  
Call Duration  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call log  
to display the Call log sub-menu.  
3. Tap Call duration  
.
Call log  
2. Press  
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume  
using these same keys.  
.
4. The following times are displayed for Voice:  
In-Call Options  
During an active call there are several functions available by  
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.  
Hold: place the current active call on hold.  
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.  
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.  
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls  
received.  
Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person.  
Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can  
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).  
End call: terminates the call.  
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and  
received.  
52  
               
Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or  
through the earpiece.  
Noise reduction on/off: allows you to turn on the Noise  
Reduction feature when you are in a noisy area. Turn it Off  
when not needed to conserve battery power.  
Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can  
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line  
will appear under the Speaker button.  
Placing a Call on Hold  
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a  
conversation. You can also make another call while you have  
a call in progress if your network supports this service.  
Tap Speaker again to use the phone’s earpiece (see “Using  
green line will turn gray when Speaker is not activated.  
1. While on a call, tap Hold  
. This action places the  
current caller on hold (which is displayed on-screen as  
a grayed-out box).  
Mute: turn the onboard microphone either on or off.  
Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line  
will appear under the Mute button.  
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold.  
To make a new call while you have a call in progress  
1. Tap Hold  
Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will  
turn gray when Mute is not activated.  
.
Headset: connects to a Bluetooth headset.  
2. Tap Add call  
to display the dialer.  
Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A  
green line will appear under the Headset button.  
3. Enter the new number and tap  
.
Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The  
green line will turn gray when the Headset is not activated.  
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large  
box in the middle of your screen and the call on hold  
will appear in a small box in the upper right corner of  
your screen.  
Press  
for more options:  
Contacts: allows you to go to your Contact list.  
Memo: allows you to jot down a memo during a call.  
Call Functions  
53  
     
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the  
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap  
Swap again to switch back.  
Switching Between Calls  
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may  
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to  
active and placing the other on hold.  
To end a call on hold  
1. Tap Swap.  
1. Tap  
to disconnect the active call.  
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the  
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so  
that you can continue conversing with that person. The  
active call will appear in a green box.  
2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap  
to end the call.  
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)  
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a  
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this  
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined  
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting  
tone.  
2. Tap  
to end the currently active call.  
To end a specific call  
1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end appears in a  
green box.  
2. Tap  
to end the specific call.  
Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have  
established with your phone (both active and on hold).  
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates  
the previous call.  
3. Tap  
to end the remaining call.  
To answer a call while you have a call in progress  
1. Touch  
and slide to the right to answer another call.  
2. Tap Putting "Number or Name" on hold to put the first  
call on hold.  
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with  
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.  
3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.  
54  
   
1. Touch and drag  
2. Touch and drag  
call.  
in any direction to answer the call.  
in any direction to answer the next  
3. Tap Putting "Number or Name" on hold to put the first  
call on hold.  
4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by  
tapping Merge.  
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap Hold  
To rejoin the conference call tap Unhold  
6. Tap to end the call.  
.
.
2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your  
phone) to adjust the volume.  
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call  
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the  
speakerphone feature.  
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap Speaker  
.
1. Tap Speaker  
.
Important! For more information, see “Responsible Listening”  
The Speaker button now appears as  
speakerphone is activated.  
and the  
Call Functions  
55  
     
Headset  
3. Tap Headset  
to deactivate the Bluetooth  
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)  
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so  
headset and reactivate the phone speaker.  
that the other person cannot hear you.  
Searching for a Number in Address Book  
1. During the active call, press  
then tap Contacts  
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room,  
but do not want the person on the phone to hear  
you.  
2. Tap the Address Book entry.  
For further details about the Address Book feature, see  
To mute your phone during a call  
Call Waiting  
Mute  
1. Tap Mute  
.
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming  
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is  
supported by the network, and you must first activate the  
Call Waiting feature:  
Mute  
The Mute button now appears as  
activated.  
and Mute is  
Mute  
2. Tap Mute  
to deactivate the Mute function and  
Tap  
Settings  
Call  
Additional settings  
reactivate the microphone.  
Call waiting  
.
Bluetooth headset  
1. Tap Headset  
Headset  
A checkmark will appear in the box when activated.  
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting  
tone.  
.
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When  
found, connect to the headset.  
Headset  
The Headset button now appears as  
and the  
Bluetooth headset is activated.  
56  
     
Section 4: Entering Text  
This section describes how to select the desired text input  
method when entering characters into your phone. This  
section also describes the predictive text entry system that  
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering  
text.  
To change the input method, see “Keyboards and Input  
Entering Text Using the Android  
Keyboard  
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone  
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen  
QWERTY keypad will display.  
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that  
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or  
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when  
entering text.  
Text Input Methods  
There are four text input methods available:  
Android keyboard (default): an on-screen QWERTY keypad  
that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation.  
Google voice typing: uses Google voice recognition to  
convert your spoken words into on-screen text.  
Samsung Keypad: Samsung’s on-screen QWERTY keypad  
that can be used in both portrait and landscape orientation.  
Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead  
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each  
letter of a word.  
Shift  
Key  
Delete  
Key  
Google Voice  
Typing  
New  
Paragraph  
Space Bar  
Text Input Mode  
Entering Text  
57  
                 
ChangingtheTextInputMode-Keypad  
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the  
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.  
The available Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc  
.
Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number,  
symbol, and emoticon keys.  
?123  
ABC  
ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys.  
Can also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift  
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.  
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the  
(
) key.  
first letter, the shift key (  
and following letters will be lowercase.  
5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap  
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will  
) will change to  
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym button will appear. When in  
Sym mode, the Abc ABC abc button will appear.  
/
/
change to  
in ABC mode. All following letters  
Using ABC Mode  
will be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.  
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a  
Landscape orientation.  
2. When you tap the Tap to enter message field, the  
following screen displays:  
58  
         
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode  
Show Correction Suggestions  
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or  
By using the Show Correction Suggestions option, you can  
have next-letter prediction and regional error correction,  
which compensates for pressing the wrong keys on the  
QWERTY keyboard.  
emoticons.  
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape  
orientation.  
1. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing  
a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of  
the words to replace the word that has already been  
typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more  
word choices.  
?123  
2. Tap  
at the bottom of the screen. The following  
screen displays:  
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon  
characters.  
=\<  
4. Tap the  
button to access additional symbols.  
to return to Abc mode.  
2. Continue typing your message. Tap Send to send the  
ABC  
5. Tap  
message or press  
for more options. For more  
Entering Text  
59  
         
Samsung Keypad Settings  
For information on changing Samsung Keypad settings, see  
Note: You can also use Show Corrections mode in the portrait  
orientation.  
Entering Text Using Swype  
To turn Show Corrections on or off:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Android keyboard  
Settings  
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a  
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,  
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error  
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the  
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text  
system.  
.
.
3. Tap Show correction suggestions, then tap your  
selection.  
Entering Text Using the Samsung  
Keypad  
The Samsung Keypad is an on-screen QWERTY keypad  
similar to the Android Keyboard with several minor  
differences.  
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.  
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it  
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and  
drag  
down from the Notifications area then tap  
Select input method  
.
2. Tap the Samsung keypad radio button. It will turn green.  
The Samsung keypad is displayed.  
60  
         
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter  
contractions.  
Enabling and Configuring Swype  
The Samsung keypad is the default text input method, so to  
use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard  
setting.  
Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a  
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.  
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.  
To enable Swype:  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and  
Google Voice Typing  
This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your  
spoken words into on-screen text.  
drag  
down from the Notifications area then tap  
Select input method  
.
2. Tap the Swype radio button. It will turn green.  
1. From the keypad, touch the top of the screen and drag  
it down to display your notification panel.  
The Swype keyboard is displayed.  
2. Tap Select input method  
.
Swype Settings  
For information on how you can configure your Swype  
3. Tap Google voice typing  
.
4. At the Listening prompt, speak into the device’s  
microphone and watch your text being entered on-  
screen.If the text is incorrect, tap the DELETE box.  
5. Once you have completed entering your message, tap  
Swype Text Entry Tips  
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video  
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following  
Swype text entry tips.  
Done  
.
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such  
Note: This feature works best when you break your message  
as pp in apple).  
down into smaller segments.  
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a  
selection.  
Entering Text  
61  
     
Section 5: Contacts and Your Address Book  
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by  
storing their name and number in your Address Book.  
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.  
Your Address Book is displayed.  
2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your  
online AT&T Address Book recently, the AT&T Address  
Book screen is displayed. Tap Yes if you want to  
synchronize your Address Book.  
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into your SIM card,  
note that only the name, phone number, group, and slot  
location are initially offered as fields (some SIM cards  
may allow an address as well). Although you may add  
additional fields to a SIM entry; if you move that same  
SIM card to another model phone, it is possible that only  
the basic information will be transferred.  
3. Follow the onscreen instructions.  
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make  
a call or send a message through your Address Book.  
You can also manage your Address Book on the web  
at http://www.att.com/addressbook  
.
Adding a New Contact  
AT&T Address Book Activation  
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your  
Address Book.  
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network  
backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized  
between your phone and online address book. The changes  
you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,  
damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your  
contacts onto your new phone.  
Saving a Number from the Home screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
.
Phone  
2. Tap  
at the top of the display to  
To activate the AT&T Address Book:  
select where you want the contact saved. It is saved to  
the Phone by default.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
.
62  
             
Mobile  
3. Tap Phone  
,
SIM, or account name.  
The Mobile button  
initially displays next to the  
Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number  
that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and  
select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,  
Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.  
4. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new  
entry by choosing one of three options:  
• Remove photo: although not an option with a new entry,  
deletes any previously assigned image on an existing contact.  
Take new photo: use the camera to take a new picture and  
7. Enter the phone number.  
assign it to this entry, then tap Save  
.
Tap  
to add another Phone number field or tap  
• Select new photo from Gallery: retrieve a previously stored  
to delete a field.  
image from your Pictures folder and assign it to this entry. Tap  
8. Tap the Email address field.  
an image to assign the image to the contact, then tap Save  
.
The keypad is displayed.  
5. Tap the Name field and use the on-screen keypad to  
Home  
The Home button  
initially displays next to the  
Email address field. If you want to add an Email address  
that is not a Home email address, tap the Home button  
and select from Home, Work, Other, Mobile, or Custom  
(add your own label).  
– or –  
Tap  
next to the Name field to display additional  
name fields.  
9. Enter the Email address.  
6. Tap the Phone number field.  
Tap  
to add another Email address field or tap  
The numerical keypad is displayed.  
to delete a field.  
10. Tap the Address field.  
The keypad is displayed.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
63  
Home  
The Home button  
initially displays next to the  
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers  
Address field. If you want to add an address that is not  
a Home address, tap the Home button and select from  
Home, Work, Other, or Custom (add your own label).  
When you call automated systems, you are often required to  
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually  
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers  
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses  
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two  
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you  
enter a number or press a key.  
11. Enter the address.  
Tap  
delete a field.  
to add another address field or tap  
to  
12. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to  
To add a pause or a wait to a Contact:  
your new contact:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
, and  
• Events: tap  
to add a Birthday, Anniversary, Other event, or  
then tap the name or number to open the Contact.  
Custom event.  
2. Tap  
to edit.  
• Groups: assign the contact to Not assigned, ICE - emergency  
contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.  
3. Tap the phone number field.  
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait  
• Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will  
sound when messages are received from this contact. Choose  
between Default, Ringtones, or Go to My files.  
needs to be added.  
#
5. Tap  
.
6. Tap Pause to add a two-second pause or tap Wait to  
add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional  
numbers. A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and  
a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon (;).  
• Add another field tap this button to add another field such as  
:
Phonetic name, Organization, IM, Notes, Nickname, Website,  
Internet call, or Relationship.  
13. Tap  
to save the new contact.  
7. Tap  
to save your changes, or tap  
to discard.  
64  
 
Finding an Address Book Entry  
Editing an Existing Contact  
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and  
change or delete the information, or you can add additional  
fields to the contact’s list of information.  
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding  
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.  
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a  
single entity, called the Address Book.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
.
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum  
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how  
they are stored may differ.  
Press and hold the Contact that you want to edit.  
2. Tap  
to edit.  
3. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete  
information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
.
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a  
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to  
the contacts beginning with that letter.  
4. Tap  
to save the edited information.  
Using Contacts  
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,  
you can dial them easily and quickly by swiping the screen  
downwards.  
From the Address book, you can also send messages.  
Tip: From the Address book, sweep right over a listing to make  
a call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
65  
         
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.  
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the  
message icon to send a message.  
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as  
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google.  
When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each  
account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.  
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a  
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also  
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married  
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge  
these accounts into your Contacts list you can join all of her  
entries and view the information in one record.  
The next time you synchronize your phone with your  
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account  
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your  
contacts list.  
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Joining Contacts  
Contacts  
.
Joining Contact Information  
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to join to  
another entry). Note: typically this is the same contact  
with a different name or account information.  
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social  
networking logins, and other similar account information. For  
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a  
corporate email account login because they are maintained  
separately and for different groups of people.  
3. Press  
Join contact.  
The contact list is displayed.  
66  
   
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to  
join). The second contact is now joined with the first  
and the account information is merged into one screen.  
Marking a Contact as Default  
When you use messaging type applications, the application  
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a  
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different  
contact records for John Smith, so the application will be  
looking for the “default” number or entry.  
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but  
displays in one record for easier viewing when you join  
the contacts.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
.
2. Tap a Contact name.  
5. Tap the Connections bar to view the contact information  
you joined. The contacts and information displays with  
an icon next to the contact name to indicate what type  
of account information is contained in the entry.  
3. Press  
Mark as default. The Mark as default  
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact  
names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.  
The radio button next to the default contact will be  
green.  
Unjoining a Contact  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
.
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next  
to another entry that you want to be the default. The  
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you  
want to unlink an entry). Note: typically this is the same  
contact with a different name or account information.  
3. Tap the Connections bar.  
radio button will turn green, then tap  
.
4. Tap the minus sign  
next to entry in which you  
want to unjoin. The contact is now separated and no  
longer displays in the merged record screen.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
67  
Options in Address Book  
Synchronizing Accounts  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
then  
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications  
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if  
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After  
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,  
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts  
list.  
press  
2. The following options are displayed:  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.  
.
• SIM Management: allows you to copy contacts from your  
phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.  
You can also delete contacts from your SIM.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press then tap Accounts  
Contacts  
.
.
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing. For  
3. Tap Sync all to synchronize all accounts.  
– or –  
Tap  
next to the account you want to sync, then tap  
.
• Import/Export: allows you to move contacts to or from your  
memory card. You can also send a namecard via Bluetooth,  
Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
Sync Now  
The accounts are synchronized.  
• Merge with Google: allows you to merge your contacts  
together with your Google account contacts.  
Address Book Options  
You can access Address Book options while at the main  
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific  
entry.  
• Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on  
Windows Live Hotmail, Yahoo! mail, Facebook, Google, and  
Microsoft Exchange Activesync. Tap Add account and then  
follow the on-screen instructions.  
68  
     
• Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google  
account.  
Options at Selected Contact Screen  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
• Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.  
• Contacts to display: You can choose to only display the  
following contacts: All contacts, SIM, Phone, Accounts that you  
have open or Customized list. Tap Customized list for more  
options on displaying your contacts.  
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press  
.
3. The following options are displayed:  
• History: allows you to view the phone and message history for  
the contact.  
• Settings: allows you to choose set the following options:  
• Edit: allows you to edit the contact information.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address  
Book.  
Only contacts with phones: allows you to only display  
contacts that have phone numbers.  
List by: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.  
Display contacts by: allows you to sort by First name first or  
Last name first.  
• Join contact: allows you to join contacts with other contacts  
(only displays when contact is saved to SIM).  
• Mark as default: when you have multiple contacts linked  
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays  
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,  
refer to “Marking a Contact as Default” on page 67.  
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s  
information via Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi  
Direct.  
Service numbers: allows you to display or edit your service  
numbers.  
Send contact: allows you to send contacts via Bluetooth in the  
form of namecards.  
AT&T Address Book: allows you to access the AT&T Address  
Book so you can sync your contacts.  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
69  
• Add to/Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove  
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the  
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.  
• Print namecard: allows you to print the contact’s namecard to  
a Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.  
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this  
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their  
name.  
5. Tap  
.
The contacts are now removed from the group.  
Groups  
Creating a New Group  
Adding an Entry to a Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
.
Groups  
New.  
Groups  
2. Press and hold the contact name that you want to add  
2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter a new group name. For more  
3. Tap Group ringtone to choose an audio file for  
to a group.  
3. Tap Add to group  
.
4. Tap the group or groups that you would like to add the  
assignment to this new group. Choose from Default  
Ringtones, or Go to My files  
4. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group.  
5. Tap to save the new Group category.  
,
contact to.  
.
5. Tap  
to save.  
The contact is added to the group.  
Removing an Entry From a Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
Groups  
.
Groups  
2. Tap a group entry.  
3. Press  
Remove member.  
70  
       
Editing a Caller Group  
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as  
Adding Favorites to your Address Book  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts  
.
part of the selected group.  
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to add to your favorites list.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Groups  
Contacts  
.
Groups  
3. Tap Add to favorites on the displayed list.  
4. A gold star will appear next to the contact in the  
Address Book.  
2. Tap a group entry.  
3. Press Edit  
.
4. Make modifications to the Group name or Group  
Removing Favorites from your Address Book  
ringtone fields.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
.
5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group.  
6. Tap to save your changes.  
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to remove from your favorites list. Contacts in  
your Favorites list will have a gold star.  
Address Book Favorites  
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,  
you can add them to your Favorites list.  
3. Tap Remove from favorites on the displayed list.  
4. The gold star will no longer appear next to the contact  
in the Address Book.  
To view your Favorites list:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Favorites  
Contacts  
Managing Address Book Entries  
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the  
Phone and SIM entries on your phone.  
.
Favorites  
Contacts and Your Address Book  
71  
           
4. Tap  
.
Copying an Entry to the SIM Card  
5. At the Copy Successful display, tap OK  
.
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,  
note that only the name, phone number, group, and slot  
location are initially offered as fields (some SIM cards  
may allow an address as well). To save additional  
information for a particular contact, such as other phone  
numbers, or e-mail, it is important to add new fields to  
that Contact information. It is also important to note that  
if you move the SIM card to another phone that does not  
support additional fields on the SIM card, this additional  
information may not be available.  
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.  
Copying an Entry to the Phone  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
More  
SIM Management.  
2. Tap Copy Contacts from SIM  
.
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts  
stored on your SIM card.  
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to  
those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
SIM Management  
2. Tap Copy Contacts to SIM  
Contacts  
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to  
your phone or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all  
entries.  
.
.
The phone then displays a list of your current phone  
contacts.  
4. Tap  
5. At the Copy Successful display, tap OK  
The selected numbers are copied to your phone.  
.
.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to  
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.  
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the  
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all  
entries.  
72  
     
Deleting Address Book Entries  
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s  
memory.  
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card  
supports Service Dialing Numbers.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts  
.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that  
you want to delete.  
3. Tap Delete on the displayed list.  
4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete the contact or  
Cancel to exit.  
Using the Service Dialing Numbers  
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)  
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may  
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and  
directory inquiries.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
2. Tap Service numbers  
3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).  
4. To dial the number displayed, tap Call  
Contacts  
.
.
.
Contacts and Your Address Book  
73  
   
Section 6: Multimedia  
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of  
your phone, including Media Hub, MOG Music, Music player,  
Movies, Live TV, Qik Lite, Video player, Gallery, Camera, and  
Camcorder.  
3. Read the Terms and Conditions screen and tap the  
agree to the Terms and Conditions checkbox.  
4. Tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit.  
The Media Hub screen displays.  
I
Media Hub  
5. At the Media Hub screen, What’s New is displayed with  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your  
fingertips, entertaining yourself or your kids on the go has  
never been easier. You can rent or purchase your favorite  
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere.  
Featuring the stunning viewing quality Samsung is known  
for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway to mobile video like  
you've never experienced it before.  
recently added media that you can rent or purchase.  
6. Tap  
for the following options:  
• Movies: displays movies that are available for rent or purchase.  
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a movie  
category. The movies of that type will be displayed below.  
• TV Shows: displays TV shows that are available for purchase.  
Scroll through the top navigation bar and select a TV category.  
The TV shows of that type will be displayed below.  
Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.  
• My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have  
purchased or rented. Tap a media entry to view it.  
Using Media Hub  
7. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item  
you would like to purchase or rent.  
1. Tap  
Settings  
Security  
Unknown sources to  
create a checkmark and allow the Samsung app to run.  
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Samsung  
account and make a purchase.  
2. Tap  
Media Hub  
.
74  
         
9. The media will be stored in the My Media folder.  
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks  
where there is a weak signal.  
Media Hub Notices  
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after  
you create an account in Media Hub.  
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)  
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the  
Media Content has been buffered.  
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on  
up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to  
the same account.  
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24  
consecutive hours of start of playback.  
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not  
extend the available viewing time.  
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more  
than once every 90 days.  
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period  
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)  
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin  
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental  
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented  
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four  
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the  
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).  
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as  
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media  
Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download  
availability and studio permissions.  
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you  
have acquired through the Service.  
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download  
Media Content.  
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub  
through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.  
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be  
viewable on only 1 device in your account.  
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.  
Multimedia  
75  
MOG Music is downloaded to your phone.  
MOG Music  
MOG Music gives you access to over 11 million songs and  
provides unlimited listening and unlimited downloads. MOG  
Music also has a desktop service, which is available for  
access from any desktop PC or browser. You can download  
any song or album straight to your mobile phone for a low  
monthly fee. You can also access the MOG Music radio.  
4. Tap Open  
.
5. Create an account by following the on-screen  
instructions.  
Using MOG Music  
After the application is downloaded and you have set up an  
account, you are ready to use MOG Music.  
Note: The MOG Music app requires a monthly subscription.  
For additional information please contact your AT&T  
service representative.  
1. Tap  
MOG Music  
.
The MOG Music screen is displayed  
2. Tap Sign In  
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to buy, download,  
and play music.  
Downloading the MOG Music App  
Note: The first time you use MOG Music, you will need to  
download the updated application from the Play Store.  
When the Play Store page displays, tap Update. For more  
Music  
The Music Player is an application that can play music files.  
The music player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+,  
eAAC+, MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the  
Music Player allows you to navigate through your music  
library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger  
than 300 KB are displayed).  
1. Tap  
MOG Music  
.
2. When the MOG Music screen is displayed, tap the New  
to Mog? Get started now arrow.  
3. Tap Update, then tap Accept & download  
.
76  
                       
Playing Music  
1. Tap  
Shuffle On: the current list of songs are randomly  
shuffled for playback.  
Music player  
.
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (All,  
Playlists, Albums, Artists, or Folders) to view the  
available music files.  
Shuffle Off: songs play in order and are not  
shuffled.  
5.1Ch  
Allows you to listen to music using 5.1 Virtual  
Surround Sound.  
(
(
)
)
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to  
begin playback.  
Displays your list of songs.  
List  
4. The following Music Player controls are available:  
Pause the song.  
Music Player Options  
To access additional options, follow these steps:  
Start the song after being paused.  
1. While in the Music Player, press  
.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to  
previous song.  
2. The follow options are available:  
• Add to quick list: adds the current music file to the Quick list.  
• Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth  
headset.  
Pressandholdtofast-forward thesong.Taptogo  
to next song.  
Volume control.  
• Share music via: allows you to share your music by using  
AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Set as: allows you to set a music file to Phone ringtone, Caller  
ringtone, or Alarm tone.  
Repeat one: repeats the currently playing song.  
Repeat all: replays the current list when the list  
ends.  
Play All: plays the current song list once.  
Multimedia  
77  
• Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a  
selected playlist.  
• Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories  
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,  
Composers, Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently  
added. Tap each item that you want to display in the Music  
menu.  
• Settings: allows you to change your music player settings. For  
• Lyrics: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if  
available.  
• Details: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title,  
Album, Track Length, Genre, Recording date, etc.  
• Music auto off: when activated, music will automatically turn  
off after a set interval.  
Music Player Settings  
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set  
preferences for the music player such as whether you want  
the music to play in the background, sound effects, and how  
the music menu displays.  
Using Playlists  
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media  
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.  
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music  
Player options menu or from within a 3rd party music  
application (such as Windows Media Player) and then  
downloaded to the handset.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Settings  
3. Select one of the following settings:  
Music player  
.
.
• Equalizer: set a type of equalization. Selections are: Auto,  
Normal, Pop, rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, Live, or Custom.  
• Sound effects: configure the music effects. Selections are:  
Normal, Wide, Concert Hall, Music clarity, Bass enhancement,  
or Externalization.  
Creating a Playlist  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Music player  
.
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Press  
Create.  
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap Save  
78  
         
Adding Music to a Playlist  
Editing a Playlist  
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you  
can also rename the playlist.  
To add files to the playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
Music player  
.
To edit a playlist:  
To edit a playlist:  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.  
4. Tap Add music  
5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music  
tracks to this playlist then tap Add  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Playlists  
3. Press  
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.  
5. Tap the Name field for the selected playlist, enter a new  
name for the playlist then tap Save  
Music player  
.
.
.
Edit title.  
.
Removing Music from a Playlist  
To remove music files from a playlist:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Music player  
.
For information on downloading music for your phone, see  
2. Tap the Playlists tab.  
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.  
4. Press Remove  
Play Music  
.
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have  
added to your music file as well as any music you copied  
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have  
5. Tap the checkbox to the right of each track you want to  
remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all  
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove  
.
Multimedia  
79  
     
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to  
continue or Exit to exit.  
Movies  
The Movies application allows you to rent movies to watch  
on your phone.  
3. When the Activate Device screen displays, tap Activate  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Unknown sources  
Settings  
Security  
4. A text message is sent to your device with an activation  
link. Go to your inbox and tap on the activation link to  
activate your device.  
.
You are now allowed to download non-Market  
applications.  
5. The AT&T U-verse Live TV website is displayed.  
6. Tap Launch Application  
.
2. From the Home screen, tap  
3. Read the Terms of Service, enter any required  
information, and tap OK  
Movies  
.
7. At the Complete action using display, tap Live TV  
.
8. When the Activation in Progress screen displays, tap  
Complete Activation to activate your device.  
The Success! screen in displayed.  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to rent movies.  
Live TV  
9. Tap Continue  
.
Live TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch  
your favorite TV shows using your handset.  
Note: Live TV will use a large amount of data and you are  
responsible for all data charges. It is strongly  
recommended that you upgrade to an unlimited data  
plan in addition to this purchase.  
1. Tap  
Live TV  
.
Note: The first time you use Live TV, you will need to download  
the application from the Market. For more information,  
10. The Live TV main page displays. Follow the on-screen  
instructions to watch TV.  
80  
       
• Video Chat: allows you to participate in two-way video chats.  
• Record & Share: allows you to record videos and have them  
instantly uploaded to the web for sharing or safe-keeping.  
• Video Mail: allows you to send videos by email.  
Qik Lite  
Qik Lite is a mobile video sharing service that lets you record  
and share experiences with your friends, family, and your  
favorite social networks. Your video is automatically saved as  
you record. You can also use Qik Lite to Video Chat with your  
friends.  
• Video Gallery: allows you to see all of your videos.  
Using Video Chat  
To use Video Chat, you and the person you want to Video  
Chat with must have a Qik Video account and be signed in.  
1. You will need to sign onto a Wi-Fi network first in order  
1. Tap  
Qik Lite  
.
LITE  
2. Tap  
Qik Lite  
.
LITE  
2. Sign on to your Qik Video account and tap Video Chat  
.
3. The first time you access Qik Lite, tap Get started! to  
create your Qik account and follow the onscreen  
prompts. The instructions will help you download the  
app from the Market. Otherwise, tap Already a Qik  
3. At the Video Chat screen, tap Dialpad, then enter the  
phone number or the Qik user name of the person you  
want to Video Chat with.  
4. Tap Start Video Chat  
.
user?  
4. Tap the username and password fields and enter your  
information, then tap Login  
.
Note: If the contact is not a Qik user, you have the option to  
send them a video mail. Tap Yes to continue, then tap  
Record new or Browse Gallery.  
.
5. To end the Video Chat, tap End Chat  
.
http://qik.com/  
.
Multimedia  
81  
     
Video player  
Full-screen view. The entire screen is used,  
which may cause some minor distortion.  
The Video player application plays video files stored on your  
microSD card.  
5.1Ch  
Allows you to listen to music using 5.1  
Virtual Surround Sound.  
(
(
)
)
1. Tap  
Video player  
.
2. All videos that you have on your memory card will be  
displayed. Tap the video that you want to play.  
3. The video will begin to play.  
Allows you to share the video using the  
AllShare app.  
4. The following video controls are available:  
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon  
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the  
icon is tapped.  
Pause the video.  
Start the video after being paused.  
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to  
go to previous video.  
For more information on downloading videos for your phone,  
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.  
Tap to go to next video.  
Volume control.  
Gallery  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and  
share as a picture message.  
Originalsizeview. Thevideowillbeplayedin  
its original size.  
1. Tap  
Gallery  
.
Full-screen in ratio view. The video is  
enlarged as much as possible without  
becoming distorted.  
All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will  
be displayed with folder name and number of files.  
82  
         
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be  
• Set as: allows you to set the picture as a Contact icon., Home  
screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.  
displayed.  
• More: displays additional options for editing and printing.  
Note: If your device displays that the memory is full when you  
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My files  
or other file management applications and try again. For  
Viewing Videos  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
Viewing Pictures  
1. Tap a thumbnail to view the picture.  
1. Touch and hold a video to select it. A checkmark will  
appear on the thumbnail.  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
2. The following options are available:  
• Send via: allows you to share the video via Bluetooth, Email,  
Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
2. The following options are available:  
• Send via: allows you to send the picture via Bluetooth, Email,  
Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the video. Tap Confirm deletions  
and the video will be deleted.  
• More: displays the following additional options:  
• Delete: allows you to delete the picture. Tap Confirm deletions  
and the picture will be deleted.  
Share via: allows you to share a video via Facebook, Google+,  
or YouTube.  
3. Press  
for additional options:  
Play via: allows you to play a video via AllShare.  
Rename: allows you to rename a video.  
• Share via: allows you to share the picture via AllShare,  
Facebook, Google+, Picasa, and Social Hub.  
Multimedia  
83  
   
Details: provides details about the picture such as Title, Type,  
Date taken, name of the Album it is in, Location, Latitude and  
Longitude (GPS coordinates), Size, Resolution, Duration, and File  
location.  
Using the Camera  
Taking Photos  
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as  
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then  
pressing the camera key.  
3. Tap a thumbnail to play the video.  
For Video player controls, see “Video player” on  
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright  
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.  
Camera  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera  
to  
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone.  
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-  
in camera functionality. Your 8 megapixel camera produces  
photos in JPEG format.  
activate the camera mode.  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Camera  
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access the camera  
from another Home screen, you must tap Applications  
Important! Do not take photos of people without their  
permission.  
Camera  
.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.  
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume  
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up  
to x4 (400 percent).  
84  
           
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap  
on-screen icons to access various camera options and  
settings.  
Storage  
Display Image  
Battery Charge  
Mode  
Front  
Facing  
Camera  
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the  
area you touch.  
Flash  
Camera  
Key  
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.  
(The picture is automatically stored within your  
designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,  
all pictures are stored on the Phone.) For more  
Image  
Viewer  
Settings  
7. To view a picture, tap the Image Viewer.  
8. While viewing a picture, double-tap the screen to zoom  
in or out.  
– or –  
Note: The number of JPEG pictures remaining on the selected  
media appears in the upper-right of the screen. This is  
an approximate number of total pictures that can be  
taken at the current image size.  
Pinch the screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it  
outwards to zoom in.  
9. Press  
to return to the viewfinder.  
Note: To enable the GPS icon, from the Camera screen tap  
Settings  
GPS tag  
On.  
Multimedia  
85  
Camera Options  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the  
screen.  
Self shot: allowsyou to set the frontcameraso you can  
take pictures of yourself or video chat.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or  
Auto flash.  
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Tap the  
screen to make them reappear.  
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode.  
Options are:  
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo  
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for  
Camcorder.  
Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before  
returning to the shooting mode.  
Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your  
subject. Once the camera detects the person’s  
smile, it takes the picture.  
Beauty: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial  
features.  
Self shot: allowsyou to set the frontcameraso you can  
take pictures of yourself.  
Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an  
initial photo and then adding additional images to  
itself. The guide box lets you view the area where  
the second part of the panoramic picture should  
fall within.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off, On, or  
Auto flash.  
A
Settings:  
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the  
settings that you use the most.  
Action shot: detects action and creates a  
panorama of the moving object.  
86  
   
Cartoon: gives your photo a cartoon look.  
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
special effects to the photo. Options include: None,  
Negative, Grayscale, and Sepia.  
Scenemode:allowsyoutosettheScenetohelptakethe  
best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait,  
Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,  
Sunset, Dawn, Fall Color, Firework, Text, Candlelight,  
and Backlight. Helpful tips are shown for each scene  
mode at the bottom of the display screen.  
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:  
8M (3264x2448), W6.5M (3264x1968),  
3.2M (2048x1536), W2.4M (2048x1232),  
W0.4M (800x480), or 0.3M (640x480).  
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness  
level by moving the slider.  
Whitebalance:allowsyoutosetthisoptiontooneofthe  
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,  
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
Focusmode:allowsyoutosetthisoptiontoAutofocus,  
Macro, or Face detection. Use Macro mode to take  
close-uppictures.Facedetectioncausesthecamerato  
automatically recognize if there is a face in the shot. It  
then optimizes the focus and exposure the face. Use  
Auto focus for all others.  
ISO:ISOdetermineshowsensitivethelight meterison  
yourdigitalcamera. ChoosefromAuto, 100, 200, 400,  
or 800. Use a lower ISO number to make your camera  
less sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take  
photos with less light, or Auto to let the camera  
automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.  
Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures  
or meters the light source: Centre-weighted, Spot, or  
Matrix.  
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait  
before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5  
sec, and 10 sec.  
Multimedia  
87  
Anti-Shake: reduces image blur due to the movement  
of the subject of the photo or hand movement.  
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer  
and the various viewing options for a selected picture.  
Image viewer options are described in the following  
section. The last picture you took, will be displayed as  
a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.  
Auto contrast: provides a clear image even under  
backlight circumstances where intensity of  
illumination can vary excessively.  
Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options  
After you take a photo or shoot a video, you can access  
various options from the Pictures and Videos Image Viewer.  
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.  
Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to:  
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.  
Image or Video  
GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known  
as Geotagging). The location of where the picture is  
taken is attached to the picture. (Only available in  
Camera mode.)  
Shuttersound:allowsyoutosettheShuttersoundtoOn  
or Off.  
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage  
location for images or videos as either Phone or  
Memory card (if inserted).  
Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder  
settings to the default values.  
Return to  
previous page  
Share  
Delete More  
88  
Available options are:  
3. Sweep the screen to the left to see the next picture or  
Share: offers several ways to share your picture or video. Options  
are: AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google+,  
Messaging, Photo Editor, Picasa, Social Hub, and Wi-Fi Direct.  
to the right to see the previous picture.  
Before you select a picture, press  
to see the following options:  
in the Camera folder  
Delete  
Cancel  
More: allows you to do the following:  
:
allows you to delete the current picture. Tap OK to delete or  
Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Bluetooth,  
.
Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Photo editor,  
Picasa, Social Hub, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.  
Create folder: create a new sub-folder in the current folder. Can  
be on either the Phone or Memory Card.  
Set as: allows you to assign the current image as either your  
current Wallpaper or as a Contact icon to display for a specific  
entry within your Address Book.  
Delete: allows you to delete selected pictures. Tap the  
checkmark, to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to  
delete, then tap Delete.  
Rename: allows you to rename a picture.  
Return to previous page  
(
): takes you back to the previously  
active camera page where you can take another photo or shoot a  
new video.  
View by: allows you to view the contents of the current folder as  
a list, as a list and details, or as thumbnails.  
Sort by: allows you to view the contents of the current folder  
sorted by Time, Type, Name, or Size.  
Accessing Pictures  
When you take a picture, the file is saved in the Camera  
folder. You can view your pictures immediately or view them  
anytime in the Camera folder.  
Move: allows you to move one or more pictures to a different  
folder.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
DCIM Camera  
2. Tap a photo file to open it in the Image viewer.  
My files  
Copy: allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different  
folder.  
.
Rename: allows you to rename one or more picture files.  
Multimedia  
89  
 
Settings: lets you set several general folder options:  
4. Tap Save.  
Show hidden files: causes files and folders that would normally  
be hidden to be displayed.  
Show file extension: causes file extensions to be displayed. For  
example, jpg.  
Set Home directory: allows you to choose and set the Home  
directory.  
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My files  
DCIM  
Camera  
<image>.  
2. Press  
Set as  
Home screen wallpaper.  
Selecting and Using the Pictures  
– or –  
From the Image viewer, you have access to both macro  
functions (zoom, crop, and rotate) and menu options. For  
more information, refer to “Pictures and Videos Image Viewer  
Options” on page 88.  
Press  
Set as  
Lock screen wallpaper  
.
3. Touch and drag the orange crop box anywhere on the  
picture.  
Editing a Photo  
You can edit your photos using the Photo editor application  
4. Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image. Tap Cancel to  
stop without updating the wallpaper image.  
Using the Camcorder  
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a  
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send  
videos.  
Assigning an Image to an Address Book Entry  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My files  
DCIM  
Camera  
<image>  
.
2. Press  
Set as  
Contact icon. Tap a contact entry.  
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to  
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.  
3. Touch and drag the orange crop box anywhere on the  
picture.  
90  
     
Shooting Video  
Camcorder Options  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the  
screen.  
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright  
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your  
subject with sufficient light by having the light source  
behind you.  
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Tap the  
screen to make them reappear.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera  
to  
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo  
in various modes. Once you change the mode, the  
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the  
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for  
Camcorder.  
activate the camera mode.  
2. Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to  
Camcorder Mode.  
3. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the  
subject.  
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode  
to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on  
thedestinationlocation,LimitforMMS,whichislimited  
by MMS size restrictions, and Self recording which  
activates the front-facing camera so you can video  
yourself.  
4. Tap the Video key ( ) to begin shooting video. The red  
light will blink while recording.  
5. Tap the Video key ( ) again to stop the recording and  
save the video file to your Camera folder.  
6. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.  
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually  
while you are taking a video.  
then tap  
7. Press  
to play your video for review.  
to return to the viewer.  
Multimedia  
91  
       
Settings:  
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:  
1920x1080,1280x720,720x480,640x480,320x240,  
or 176x144.  
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the  
settings that you use the most.  
Whitebalance:allowsyoutosetthisoptiontooneofthe  
following choices: Auto, Daylight, Cloudy,  
Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
Flash: allows you to set the flash options to Off or On.  
When you set the flash to On, it stays on continually  
while you are taking a video.  
Outdoor visibility: allows you to take better pictures  
when outdoors. Options are Off or On.  
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode  
to: Normal, which is limited only by available space on  
thedestinationlocation,LimitforMMS,whichislimited  
by MMS size restrictions, and Self recording which  
activates the front-facing camera so you can video  
yourself.  
Video quality: allows you to set the image quality to:  
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.  
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.  
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage  
location for images or videos as either Phone or  
Memory card (if inserted).  
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness  
level by moving the slider.  
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait  
beforetakingavideo.Optionsinclude:Off,2sec,5sec,  
and 10 sec.  
Reset: allows you to reset all camera or camcorder  
settings to the default values.  
Effects: allows you to change the color tone or apply  
special effects to the photo. Options include: None,  
Negative, Grayscale, and Sepia.  
92  
Accessing Videos  
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera  
folder. You can view your videos immediately or view them  
anytime in the Camera folder.  
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer  
and the various viewing options for a selected video.  
Image viewer options are described in the following  
section. The last video you took, will be displayed as a  
thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
DCIM Camera  
My files  
.
Camcorder Options after a Video is Taken  
2. Tap a video file to open it in the viewer and initiate  
After you shoot a video, you can access various options from  
playback.  
the Pictures and Videos Image Viewer.  
3. To pause the video, tap  
. To play the video, tap  
.
The following options are available:  
Before you select a video to play, press  
folder to see the following options:  
in the Camera  
Share: offers several ways to share your video. Options are:  
AllShare, Bluetooth, Email, Facebook, Gmail, Messaging, Wi-Fi,  
and YouTube.  
Share: lets you share selected pictures with AllShare, Bluetooth,  
Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Photo Editor,  
Picasa, Social Hub, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.  
Delete: allows you to delete the current video. Tap OK to delete or  
Cancel  
.
Create folder: create a new sub-folder in the current folder. Can  
be on either the Phone or Memory Card.  
More: allows you to access the following additional options:  
Play: allows you to play the video  
Rename: allows you to rename the video.  
Delete: allows you to delete selected videos. Tap the checkmark,  
to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to delete, then  
tap Delete.  
View by: allows you to view the contents of the current folder as  
a list, as a list and details, or as thumbnails.  
Multimedia  
93  
   
Sort by: allows you to view the contents of the current folder  
sorted by Time, Type, Name, or Size.  
Subtitles: allows you to view subtitles if they are present in the  
video.  
Move: allows you to move one or more videos to a different  
folder.  
Details: displays file information such as file name, format,  
resolution, file size, date & time, and forwarding capability.  
Copy: allows you to copy one or more videos to a different folder.  
Rename: allows you to rename one or more video files.  
Settings: lets you set several general folder options:  
While viewing a video, you can also adjust the screen view.  
Screen view allows you to select Original Size, Full-Screen,  
or Full-Screen in Ratio to view your video.  
Show hidden files: causes files and folders that would normally  
be hidden to be displayed.  
Show file extension: causes file extensions to be displayed. For  
example, 3gp.  
Set Home directory: allows you to choose and set the Home  
directory.  
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon  
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the  
icon is tapped.  
Original Size: (  
Full-Screen in Ratio View: (  
as possible without becoming distorted.  
Full-Screen View: ( the entire screen is used, which may  
cause some minor distortion.  
Pause/Resume: tap to pause the video being played.  
to resume playing.  
) the video will be played in its original size.  
) the video is enlarged as much  
While you are playing a video, press  
following options:  
to display the  
)
Share via: lets you share the video with AllShare, Bluetooth,  
Facebook, Wi-Fi Direct, Messaging, YouTube, Email, or Gmail.  
Video brightness: allows you to set the brightness for a video  
that is playing. You can also select Automatic brightness.  
Via Bluetooth: scans for a Bluetooth device on which to play the  
video.  
Tap  
Previous/Next  
:
tap  
to jump to the previously played video  
or tap  
to jump to the next video file in the Camera folder.  
94  
Exit: to return to the videos list, tap the  
corner of the screen.  
icon in the top right  
Rotate: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4  
directions. You can also mirror image a photo.  
Photo editor  
Move: use the move feature to move a photo  
around when you are zoomed in and the entire  
photo is not showing on the screen.  
The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions  
for pictures that you take on your phone. Along with basic  
image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color it also  
provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture.  
Tools: allows you to Copy and Paste to different  
images. You can also use Warping and Fill.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Photo editor  
.
Effects: allows you to add various effects to your  
photo.  
2. Tap Select picture to edit a picture in your Gallery.  
– or –  
Color: allows you to adjust the Saturation,  
Contrast, Brightness of a photo. You can also  
make it gray-scale.  
Tap Capture picture to take a picture with the camera.  
3. Tap the picture and it is loaded into the Photo editor.  
4. Use the following Photo editor controls to edit your  
picture:  
Next: move to next photo project.  
Previous: move to previous photo project.  
Selection Size: allows you to set the size of the  
selection tool to Small, Medium, or Large.  
Selection: use the selection tool to mark an area  
for cropping, rotating, etc.  
5. Press  
to access the following options:  
• New: starts a new Photo Editor project. Be sure and save the  
photo you are working on before starting a new project.  
Crop: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a  
photo.  
Multimedia  
95  
   
• Save: saves your photo to your gallery.  
• Share: allows you to share your photo via AllShare, Bluetooth,  
Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Picasa, or Wi-Fi  
Direct.  
96  
Section 7: Messaging  
This section describes how to send and receive different  
types of messages. It also includes the features and  
functionality associated with messaging.  
Important! When creating a message, adding an image, a  
sound file, or a video clip to a text message  
changes the message from a text message to a  
multimedia message.  
Types of Messages  
Your phone provides the following message types:  
Text Messages  
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and  
indicate when messages are received and their type. For  
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages  
Email and Gmail Messages  
Google Talk  
Creating and Sending Messages  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
Google +  
New message  
.
Messenger  
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive  
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s message service.  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Messaging  
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access  
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap  
Applications  
Messaging  
.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and  
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and  
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s multimedia message service.  
2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a  
recipient or tap  
Contacts.  
to select a recipient from your  
Messaging  
97  
           
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the  
contact to place a checkmark then tap  
Message Options  
.
Options before composing a message  
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
2. Before composing a message, press  
to reveal  
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less  
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will  
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by  
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted  
entries.  
additional messaging options:  
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for  
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the  
Messaging Search window and tap  
.
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more  
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread.  
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will  
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with  
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.  
appear next to the message. Tap Delete  
.
4. Tap the Tap to enter message field and use the on-  
screen keypad to enter a message. For more  
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.  
Options while composing a message  
1. While composing a message, press  
additional messaging options.  
to reveal  
6. Review your message and tap Send  
.
• Insert smiley: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy  
face to your message.  
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be  
• Call: allows you to call the contact. This option only appears if  
you have entered a phone number for the recipient.  
automatically saved as a draft.  
98  
     
• Add text: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,  
or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient  
feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your  
message. For more information, refer to “Adding  
Additional Text” on page 100.  
Videos: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos  
list, then add it to your message  
.
Capture video: allows you to temporarily exit the message,  
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it  
to your message by tapping Save  
.
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the recipient to your  
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not  
already in your Contacts list.  
Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the  
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to  
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping OK  
.
• View contact: allows you to see information on the recipient.  
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.  
• Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message.  
• Delete message: allows you to delete the message.  
Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and  
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then  
automatically attached to the message.  
Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing  
your location.  
Adding attachments to a message  
To add an attachment to your message, tap  
Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,  
and select  
then add it to your message by tapping  
Calendar: allows you to tap on an existing Calendar event,  
then add it to your message by tapping Add  
Memo: allows you to tap on an existing Memo, then add it to  
your message by tapping Attach  
Task: allows you to tap on an existing Task list, then add it to  
your message by tapping Attach  
.
one of the following options:  
Pictures: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures  
list to add it to your message.  
.
Take picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take a  
photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by  
.
tapping Save  
.
.
Messaging  
99  
Adding Additional Text  
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and  
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.  
1. While composing a message, press  
Viewing New Received Messages  
1. When you receive a new message, the new message  
icon will appear at the top of your screen.  
2. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For  
Add text.  
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:  
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the  
location on Google Maps.  
– or –  
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of  
any of your contacts to your message.  
From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
tap the new message to view it.  
then  
• Memo: allows you to add an entire memo to your message.  
Task: allows you to add a task to your message.  
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a  
calendar event to your message.  
The selected message appears in the display.  
3. To play a multimedia message, tap  
.
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap  
.
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages  
have been added), touch the screen and in a single  
motion, scroll up or down the page.  
Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and  
sentences.  
3. Tap the information you want to send. This will place a  
checkmark next to the item.  
Message Threads  
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped  
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see  
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and  
4. Tap Add unless you are adding text from Location.  
The text is added to your message.  
100  
 
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed  
in the order in which they were received, with the latest  
message displayed at the top.  
Deleting multiple message threads  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
2. Press  
Delete threads.  
To open a threaded message follow these steps:  
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
.
will appear beside each message you select.  
Tap the message thread you want to view.  
4. Tap Delete  
.
2. Touch and hold the message thread to display the  
following options:  
5. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to  
cancel.  
• View contact: displays the contact’s information. This option  
only displays if the sender is in your Contacts list.  
• Add to Contacts: displays the Contacts information screen.  
This option only displays if the sender is not in your Contacts  
list.  
Message Search  
You can search through your messages by using the  
Message Search feature.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
2. Tap Search  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to  
search for, then tap  
.
.
• Delete thread: displays a confirmation dialog box that when  
pressed, deletes the entire thread.  
.
Deleting Messages  
4. All messages that contain the search string you  
Deleting a single message thread  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
entered are displayed.  
.
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap Delete thread  
.
3. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to  
cancel.  
Messaging  
101  
       
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your  
Message center where your messages reside while the system  
is attempting to deliver them.  
Messaging Settings  
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia  
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.  
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text  
messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or  
Automatic.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging  
Settings  
.
2. The following Messaging settings are available:  
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to retrieve  
messages automatically.  
• Message font size: allows you to set the size of your message  
text to Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge.  
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,  
Restricted, or Warning.  
• Split view: allows you to enable split view when you have the  
phone in landscape orientation.  
Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with  
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.  
Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that  
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the  
Core MM Content Domain.  
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is  
reached, rather than having them overwritten.  
Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text  
messages can be in one conversation.  
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how  
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.  
Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and  
sentences.  
Free: you may add any content to the message.  
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from  
the network.  
• CB activation: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)  
messages.  
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the  
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.  
102  
   
• Channel configuration: allows you to set up the channel that  
you will receive CB messages on.  
5. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,  
tap Show password to create a checkmark.  
• Language: allows you to select all of the languages that you  
want to receive CB messages in.  
6. Tap Next.  
7. Enter an account name for this email account  
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your  
status bar.  
(optional).  
8. Tap Done  
.
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your  
message notifications.  
Synchronizing a Corporate Email Account  
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to  
Using Email  
Email enables you to review and create email using various  
email services. You can also receive text message alerts  
when you receive an important email.  
synchronize with a corporate email account.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup  
screen displayed.  
Creating an Email Account  
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
4. If you want to use this email with Social Hub, tap Set as  
premium account to create a checkmark.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup  
screen displayed.  
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.  
3. Enter your password in the Password field.  
4. If you want to use this email with Social Hub, tap Set as  
premium account to create a checkmark.  
5. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,  
tap Show password to create a checkmark.  
6. Scroll down and tap Manual setup  
.
7. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field.  
Messaging  
103  
         
8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,  
Username and Password, then tap Next  
9. At the prompt tap OK  
Switching Between Email Accounts  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
.
.
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from  
the active account.  
The Account options screen is displayed.  
10. Enter the desired information in the different fields,  
2. Tap the box at the top of your screen that displays the  
optional name you assigned to your first email account,  
for example, Work, Gmail, etc.  
then tap Next  
.
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional).  
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.  
Your Email account screen is displayed.  
12. Tap Done  
.
3. In the Accounts section, tap the Email account you  
would like to switch to. You can also select Combined  
view which will display email messages from all  
accounts.  
13. Press  
More  
Account Settings to change the  
account settings.  
Creating Additional Email Accounts  
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first  
4. The new Email account is displayed.  
account, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Email  
Using Gmail  
.
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the  
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the  
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized  
with your Gmail account.  
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from  
the active account.  
2. Press  
Settings  
then enter the  
information required to set up another account. For  
more information, refer to “Creating an Email Account”  
on page 103.  
104  
         
6. Tap  
to send.  
Signing into Your Gmail  
Viewing a Gmail Message  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.  
2. The following options are available at the bottom of the  
screen:  
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to  
access Gmail.  
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
• Archive : archives the selected message.  
• Delete : deletes the message.  
• Labels  
: allows you to attach labels to a message. This is  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Gmail  
.
similar to putting it in a folder.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
• Mark Unread  
: after reading a message, marks as unread.  
The Inbox loads conversations and email.  
• Newer: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.  
• Older: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.  
Creating a Gmail Message  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap  
at the bottom of the  
3. Before selecting a message, press  
to select one of  
screen to create a new message.  
the following additional options:  
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.  
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a  
comma.  
• Label settings: allows you to set sync and notification settings.  
• Settings: displays Email settings that you can modify.  
• Help: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the  
web for help.  
3. Tap  
copy.  
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind  
• Send feedback: allows you to send feedback or report a  
problem.  
4. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.  
5. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your  
message.  
Messaging  
105  
 
4. After selecting a message, press  
to select one of  
Google Talk  
the following additional options:  
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are  
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.  
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your  
Gmail accounts.  
• Mark important/not important: allows you to set the  
importance of a message.  
• Mute: allows you to mute the sound in a message if applicable.  
• Report spam: allows you to report a message as spam. Tap  
the UNDO option if you change your mind.  
• Settings: displays Email settings that you can modify.  
• Help: displays the Google.com webpage so you can search the  
web for help.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Talk  
.
3. Begin using Google Talk.  
• Send feedback: allows you to send feedback or report a  
problem.  
Note: If you have already signed into an IM account, it is  
displayed on the Talk application screen.  
Other Gmail Options  
1. Tap at the bottom of the screen to refresh the  
Google +  
screen, send and receive new emails, and synchronize  
your email with the Gmail account.  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+.  
2. Tap  
at the bottom of the screen to set up and  
manage Labels for your Gmail messages.  
3. Tap  
at the bottom of the screen to search through  
your Gmail messages.  
106  
       
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
– or –  
Tap Create a new account to create another account.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Google+  
.
4. At the Messenger screen, tap  
to start a new  
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
message.  
Google+.  
– or –  
5. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or  
circle.  
Tap Add account to create another account.  
6. In the bottom message field, enter a message then tap  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.  
.
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.  
7. From the Messenger screen, tap Learn more for more  
detailed information.  
Messenger  
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into  
a simple group conversation. When you get a new  
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your  
phone.  
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Messenger  
.
– or –  
From the Google+ application, select Messenger  
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
Google+.  
Messaging  
107  
   
Section 8: Changing Your Settings  
This section explains the settings used for customizing your  
device.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Advanced  
The following options are available:  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
.
Accessing Settings  
From any Home screen, tap  
– or –  
Settings.  
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.  
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to  
disconnect from Wi-Fi.  
From any Home screen, press  
The Settings screen displays.  
Settings.  
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an  
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.  
• Notify AT&T network: automatically notifies you when you are  
in the range of an AT&T Wi-Fi network.  
Wi-Fi Settings  
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on  
• Wi-Fi frequency band: allows you to specify the frequency  
range of operation. Choose from Auto, 5GHz only, or 2.4 GHz  
only.  
Activating Wi-Fi  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required  
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).  
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
.
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings  
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage  
wireless access points.  
108  
           
• Visible time-out: Use this setting to control when to  
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5  
minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.  
Bluetooth settings  
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a  
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices  
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices  
with which to pair.  
• Show received files: Show the list of files received by using  
Bluetooth.  
Activating Bluetooth  
Data Usage  
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and  
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
usage  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Mobile  
data field, to turn Mobile data usage ON  
Settings  
Data  
.
Additional Bluetooth Settings  
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
Bluetooth  
.
3. Tap Set mobile data limit to create a checkmark and  
allow a data limit to be set.  
.
2. Tap Scan for devices to scan for nearby discoverable  
devices. After searching, tap a device to pair with it.  
4. Tap the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and select a  
date.  
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also  
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of  
how many MB were used per application.  
3. Tap  
and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:  
• Device Name: Your device’s default name displays on screen.  
Tap to change the device name. Available when Bluetooth is  
turned On.  
Changing Your Settings  
109  
   
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
More....  
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider  
2. Tap Airplane mode. A check mark displayed next to the  
may account for data usage differently.  
feature indicates Airplane mode is active. The Airplane  
mode icon  
is displayed at the top of your screen.  
More... Settings  
This tab displays additional wireless and network  
information.  
USB utilities  
This option allows you to copy files between your PC and the  
memory card in your phone.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
More....  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
USB utilities  
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.  
3. Tap Connect storage to PC  
Settings  
More...  
Options display for Airplane mode, USB Utilities, VPN,  
Tethering and portable hotspots, NFC, Android Beam,  
Wi-Fi Direct, and Mobile networks.  
.
.
Airplane mode  
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s  
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are  
4. From your PC, open the folder to view your files.  
5. Copy files between your PC and the memory card.  
VPN settings  
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage  
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving  
calls or data is prohibited.  
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).  
Important! When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot  
send or receive any calls or access online  
information or applications.  
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and  
configure one.  
110  
     
IPSec Xauth RSA  
IPSec Hybrid RSA  
Adding a VPN  
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN  
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),  
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-  
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT  
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).  
5. Enter the Server address and any other required fields.  
6. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display  
additional VPN options.  
7. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
VPN  
Settings  
More...  
Tethering & portable hotspot  
.
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data  
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
USB Tethering  
Note: You must first set up a Lock screen using either a PIN or  
a password. For more information, refer to “Screen  
Lock” on page 125.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
More...  
Tethering and portable hotspots  
.
2. Tap Add VPN network  
.
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.  
3. Enter a name for the VPN network in the Name field.  
4. Select a VPN type from the Type drop-down menu. The  
options are:  
3. Tap USB tethering to add a checkmark and activate the  
feature. The USB tethering icon  
top of your screen.  
is displayed at the  
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)  
L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol  
Security Pre-Shared Key)  
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Tethering and portable hotspots  
hotspots  
Settings  
More...  
Portable Wi-Fi  
L2TP/IPSec RSA  
.
IPSec Xauth PSK  
Changing Your Settings  
111  
     
2. Turn Portable Wi-Fi Hotspots on by tapping the slider so  
Note: Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be  
that it changes to the ON position  
The Portable Wi-Fi hotspot icon  
top of your screen.  
.
different depending on the type of the other device.  
is displayed at the  
Help  
3. Tap Configure  
.
From the Tethering and portable hotspot menu, tap Help  
4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Hide my device,  
Security setting and Password.  
for additional information.  
NFC  
5. Tap Show password and Show advanced options to see  
them displayed.  
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when  
you touch your device with another compatible device. This  
is used for applications such as Android Beam.  
6. Tap Save  
.
Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other  
devices  
To activate NFC, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
More....  
1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to  
2. Tap NFC to create a checkmark and activate the  
your phone.  
feature.  
2. Find [SGllskyrocket_xxxx] in the Wi-Fi network list and  
connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits  
that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi  
hotspot on your device.  
Android Beam  
When Android Beam is activated, you can beam application  
content to another NFC-capable device by touching the  
devices back-to-back. You can beam browser pages,  
YouTube videos, contacts, and more.  
The connected device can now use internet through  
your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Android Beam  
Settings  
More...  
.
112  
 
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Android Beam on  
.
2. Tap Use packet data to create a checkmark and  
activate the feature.  
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-  
capable device and the content is transferred.  
Data Roaming  
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service  
provider’s partner networks and access data services when  
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.  
Activating Wi-Fi Direct  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mobile networks  
Settings  
More...  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Wi-Fi Direct  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi Direct on  
Settings  
More...  
2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate  
the feature.  
.
.
Access Point Names  
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point  
(hotspot).  
Mobile networks  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Mobile networks options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mobile networks  
2. Tap Access Point Names  
Settings  
More...  
.
.
A list of the Access Point names display. The active  
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right  
of the name.  
Use Packet Data  
To activate the data network, this option must be selected. It  
is set on by default.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mobile networks  
Settings  
More...  
.
Changing Your Settings  
113  
 
Network Operators  
Default setup options  
Using this feature you can view the current network  
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator  
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.  
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically  
search for an available network. You can set this option to  
Manual to select a network each time you connect.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mobile networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
Settings  
More...  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Wireless and network Mobile networks  
2. Tap Network operators  
3. Tap Default setup  
Settings  
.
.
.
.
The current network connection displays at the bottom  
of the list.  
.
4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network  
manually, or tap Automatic to allow the device to  
automatically select a network.  
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching  
for an available network.  
Call Settings  
To access the Call settings menu:  
3. Tap Search networks to manually search for a network.  
4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a  
network connection.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Settings  
Call  
Call  
.
Call rejection  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer  
Call rejection  
Auto reject mode to enable your phone  
speed and time.  
to reject calls.  
2. Select Off  
,
All numbers, or Auto reject numbers  
.
3. Tap Auto reject list  
.
4. Tap  
to manually add numbers to the Reject list.  
114  
   
5. Tap Unknown, to create a checkmark and automatically  
Call answering/ending  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
reject all unknown calls.  
Settings  
Call  
Call answering/ending  
.
Set reject messages  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. The following options are available:  
Settings  
Call  
• Answering key: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming  
calls by pressing the Home key.  
Set reject messages  
2. Tap to manually add a reject message.  
– or –  
.
• Automatic answering: Tap this option if you are using a  
headset and want the call to be automatically answered. Select  
the time interval before the call is automatically answered.  
• The Power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a  
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.  
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed  
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the  
message if desired.  
3. Tap Save  
Call alert  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Call alert  
.
Turn on proximity sensor  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Call  
Settings  
Call  
Turn on proximity sensor  
.
.
When you answer a call, the screen will be turned off  
to save power.  
2. Tap Answer vibration to enable your phone to vibrate  
when the called party answers the phone.  
Call forwarding  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
3. Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a  
call then tap OK  
.
Settings  
Call  
Call forwarding  
Voice call.  
4. Tap Alerts on call to set the alert type.  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Always forward: allows you to forward all voice calls.  
Changing Your Settings  
115  
• Forward when busy: allows you to forward voice calls to a  
designated number instead of your voice mail number if you  
are on another phone call.  
Hearing aids  
This option allows you to turn on Hearing aid compatibility on  
your device.  
• Forward when unanswered: allows you to forward voice calls  
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number  
when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select  
the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.  
• Forward when unreachable: allows you to forward voice calls  
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number  
when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or  
when your phone is switched off.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Call.  
2. Tap Hearing aids to create a checkmark and make your  
device compatible with a Hearing aid.  
Additional settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Call  
Additional settings  
.
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be  
displayed. Select Network Default, Hide number, or Show  
number.  
TTY Mode  
This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid  
Compatibility for this device.  
• Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone  
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.  
• Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call  
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.  
• Fixed dialing numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to  
a limited set of phone numbers.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
TTY mode  
Settings  
Call  
.
2. Tap Full TTY. A green checkmark will appear. Tap TTY  
mode off to turn it off.  
116  
 
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.  
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers  
Enabling FDN  
Managing the FDN List  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Call  
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to  
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.  
Additional settings  
2. Tap Enable FDN  
Fixed dialing numbers.  
.
Note: Before you can manage an FDN list, a list must be  
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
.
created.  
FDN is enabled.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Additional settings Fixed Dialing Numbers  
2. Tap FDN list  
Settings  
Call  
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Disable  
FDN, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
.
.
.
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card  
does not, this menu does not display.  
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.  
Voicemail service  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering  
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to  
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.  
Settings  
Call  
Voicemail service  
.
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the  
default.  
Changing the PIN2 Code  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Additional settings Fixed Dialing Numbers  
2. Tap Change PIN2  
Settings  
Call  
2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service.  
.
.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.  
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.  
Changing Your Settings  
117  
Voicemail  
Vibration intensity  
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the  
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this  
menu.  
vibration is for different options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voicemail  
Settings  
Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Vibration intensity  
Settings  
Sound  
.
.
2. Tap the Voice mail number field, backspace to erase the  
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration  
intensity for Ringtone, Notification, and Vibrate on  
screen tap.  
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the  
keypad, then tap OK  
.
3. Tap OK  
.
Silent mode  
Sound Settings  
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.  
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone  
from making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode  
the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify  
you of incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a  
defined tone or sound as an alert.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Sound.  
The following options display:  
Volume  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Silent mode  
Settings  
Sound.  
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all  
.
phone sounds in one easy location.  
3. Tap Off Vibrate, or Mute.  
,
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Volume  
Settings  
Sound  
– or –  
.
1. From the Home screen, press the Lock key until Phone  
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume  
options displays.  
for Media, Ringtone, Notifications, and System.  
3. Tap OK  
.
118  
   
2. Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode (the  
System Tone Settings  
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing  
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the  
screen.  
current mode displays).  
Phone ringtone  
This option allows you to set the ringtone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Sound.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Phone ringtone  
Settings  
Sound.  
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the feature:  
.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK  
.
• Keytones: makes a sound when you tap a key on the  
keyboard.  
Default Notifications  
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for  
notifications and alarms.  
Touch sounds: makes a sound when you touch the screen.  
• Screen lock sound: makes a sound when your screen is  
locked or unlocked.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Default Notifications  
Settings  
Sound.  
.
• Vibrate on screen tap: makes a vibration when you tap the  
screen.  
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK  
.
Sound and Vibration  
Display Settings  
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings Sound  
2. Tap Sound and vibration. A green checkmark appears.  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display  
such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle  
lock feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, power  
saving mode, and tv out settings.  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Display.  
Changing Your Settings  
119  
 
The following options display:  
• Font style: allows you to set the font style that your phone will  
use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider  
selection.  
• Home screen wallpaper: allows you to set the home screen  
wallpaper.  
• Display battery percentage: allows you to see the battery  
charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of  
the display.  
• Lock screen wallpaper: allows you to set the lock screen  
wallpaper.  
• Clock: allows you to display the clock on the lock screen.  
• Weather: allows you to display the weather on the lock screen.  
• Weather settings: allows you to have the temperature  
displayed in Fahrenheit or Celsius. You can also set the Auto  
refresh rate.  
Touch key light duration: allows you to set the time that the  
touch keys located on the bottom of your phone are lit.  
• Auto adjust screen power: allows you to save power because  
the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the  
LCD brightness.  
• Clock and weather position: allows you to set the location of  
the Clock and Weather to Top, Middle, or Bottom.  
• Help text: displays Help text on the lock screen.  
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap  
Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag  
the slider and tap OK.  
• Gyroscope calibration: allows you to calibrate the gyro  
sensors. Place your device on a level surface and tap  
Calibrate  
.
Power Saving Mode  
Power Saving Mode allows you to manage your phone to  
conserve power.  
• Auto-rotate screen: allows you to switch the display  
orientation automatically when you rotate the phone.  
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen  
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30  
seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
saving  
Settings  
Power  
.
120  
 
2. Tap System power saving to create a checkmark and  
activate the feature. System power saving uses default  
settings to help save power on your phone.  
– or –  
• Brightness: allows you to set the Brightness percentage of the  
screen.  
• Screen timeout: allows you to set the time before the screen  
times out and goes into lock mode.  
Tap Custom power saving to create a checkmark and  
activate the feature. Custom power saving allows you  
to select the items that will be used to save power.  
4. Tap Learn about power saving to learn about various  
ways to conserve battery power.  
Storage  
3. If you selected Custom power saving, tap Custom power  
saving settings to access the following options:  
• Power saving starts at: allows you to set the battery power  
level when Power saving mode will be enabled.  
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the  
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD  
card.  
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD  
Turn off Wi-Fi: automatically turns off Wi-Fi when you are not  
connected with Mobile AP.  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
Turn off Bluetooth: automatically turns off Bluetooth when it is  
not in use.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings ➔  
Storage.The available memory displays under the Total  
space and Available space headings for Device  
memory, USB storage, and SD card.  
Turn off GPS: automatically turns off GPS when it is not in use.  
Turn off Sync: automatically turns off Sync when the phone is  
not synchronizing with the server.  
Formatting USB storage  
• Brightness: allows you to manually adjust the brightness of the  
screen. Tap this option to enable the next Brightness option.  
Tap Format USB storage to erase all data on the phone’s  
USB storage such as music and photos.  
Changing Your Settings  
121  
   
SD card  
1. Tap Unmount SD card to unmount your SD card so that  
you can safely remove it, then tap OK  
Applications  
You can download and install applications from the Play  
Store or create applications using the Android SDK and install  
them on your device. Use Applications settings to manage  
applications.  
.
2. Tap Format SD card to re-format your SD card. This will  
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,  
and photos.  
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or  
any other company, end-users operate these devices  
at their own risk.  
3. Tap Format SD card again.  
4. Tap Delete all to continue or press  
to cancel.  
Battery  
See how much battery power is used for device activities.  
Memory Usage  
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running  
applications.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Settings Battery.  
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount  
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery  
usage displays in percentages per application.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Applications  
2. Tap Downloaded  
Settings ➔  
.
2. Tap Screen Android System, or any other listed  
,
,
On SD card  
,
Running, or All to display  
application to view how it is affecting battery use.  
memory usage for that category of applications.  
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows  
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom  
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.  
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery  
use.  
122  
   
Downloaded  
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.  
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is  
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Applications  
Settings ➔  
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services  
may have undesirable consequences on the  
application or Android System.  
.
2. Tap the Downloaded tab to view a list of all the  
downloaded applications on your device.  
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the  
• Report: Report failure and other application information.  
Downloaded tabs, press  
name  
Sort by size or Sort by  
Note: Options vary by application.  
.
4. Tap an application to view and update information  
about the application, including memory usage, default  
settings, and permissions.  
Accounts and Sync  
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize  
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.  
Adding an Account  
Running Services  
View and control services running on your device.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
and sync  
2. Tap Add account  
3. Tap one of the account types.  
Settings Accounts  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
Applications  
Settings ➔  
.
.
.
2. Tap the Running tab. All the applications that are  
currently running on the device display.  
3. Tap one of the applications to view application  
information.  
4. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your  
credentials and set up the account.  
The following options display:  
Changing Your Settings  
123  
       
Removing an Account  
3. On the Accounts and sync field, tap the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Auto-sync on or off, which controls  
whether changes you make to information on your  
device or on the web are automatically synced with  
each other.  
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its  
messages, contacts, and other data from the  
device.  
Data and Synchronization  
To sync account information manually:  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
and sync  
Settings Accounts  
.
1. From a Home screen, tap  
and sync  
2. Tap on an account.  
Settings Accounts  
2. Tap an account to display its settings.  
3. Tap Remove account, then tap Remove account at the  
prompt to remove the account and delete all its  
messages, contacts, and other data.  
.
3. Tap Sync Now to synchronize all data for the selected  
account.  
– or –  
Synchronizing Account  
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account  
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.  
Under Data and synchronization, tap the account data  
to synchronize, such as Books, Calendar, Contacts,  
Email, and so on.  
1. From a Home screen, tap  
and sync  
Settings Accounts  
.
2. Tap Sync all to synchronize all your accounts. Tap  
Location Services  
The Location services settings allow you to set up how the  
phone will determine your location and the sensor settings  
for your phone.  
Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.  
124  
     
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Location services  
Settings  
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will  
never lock.  
.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the service:  
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.  
• Face unlock: The phone recognizes your face and unlocks the  
phone. Follow the on-screen instructions to set it up.  
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create  
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or  
change your screen unlock pattern.  
• Google location service: allows applications to use data from  
other sources such as mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help  
determine your location.  
• GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint your  
location.  
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.  
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.  
• Location and Google search: allows Google to use your  
location data for improved search results and other services.  
Owner Information  
This option allows you to show owner information on the lock  
screen. You can also enter text to display on the lock screen.  
Security  
The Security settings allow you to determine the security  
level for your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Owner information  
Settings  
Security  
Screen Lock  
.
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more  
information about using the lock and unlock features, see  
2. Tap the Show owner info on lock screen checkbox to  
create a checkmark if you want your owner information  
displayed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Screen lock for these options:  
Settings  
3. Enter text that you would like displayed on your  
.
lockscreen and tap  
.
Changing Your Settings  
125  
 
Encryption  
Set up SIM card lock  
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make  
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on  
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.  
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your tablet  
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD  
card each time it is connected:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each  
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also  
change your SIM PIN number.  
.
2. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the  
displayed help screen.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock  
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap  
OK  
Settings  
.
3. Tap Encrypt SD card to enable the encryption on SD  
card data that requires a password be entered each  
time the microSD card is connected.  
.
.
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.  
Encryption may take an hour or more.  
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change  
your SIM PIN code.  
Set up/change password  
Use this option to set up your password when one is first  
required or change your current password.  
4. Tap Change SIM PIN  
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK  
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Set up/change password  
2. Enter a new password and tap Confirm  
Settings  
Security  
.
.
.
.
3. Enter the new password again and tap Confirm  
.
126  
Make passwords visible  
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you  
touch them while entering passwords.  
Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration  
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Select device administrators  
Settings  
.
.
2. Tap Make passwords visible to create a checkmark and  
.
enable or disable the display of password characters.  
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If  
no device administrators are listed, you can download  
them from the Play Store.  
Device Administrators  
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or  
more administration applications that control your device for  
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of  
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device  
security policies.  
Unknown sources  
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market  
applications.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Unknown sources  
Settings  
Some of the features a device administration application  
might control are:  
.
.
Setting the number of failed password attempts before the  
device is restored to factory settings.  
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.  
Automatically locking the device.  
Warning! Enabling this option causes your tablet and personal  
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications  
from unknown sources.  
Restoring factory settings on the device.  
Changing Your Settings  
127  
 
Trusted Credentials  
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or  
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or  
remove it.  
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable  
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the  
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a  
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently  
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
2. Tap Trusted credentials  
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:  
Settings  
.
5. Tap OK to return to the certificate list.  
.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.  
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed  
in the ROM of your device.  
Install from device storage  
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.  
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for  
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.  
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.  
A scrolling screen displays the details.  
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing  
encrypted certificates to use this feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap  
Disable to disable a System certificate or Remove to  
remove a User certificate.  
.
2. Tap Install from device storage, then choose a  
certificate and follow the prompts to install.  
128  
 
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap Default and select a keyboard.  
Settings  
Clear credentials  
Clear stored credentials.  
.
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted  
Select either Android keyboard, Samsung keypad, or  
Swype.  
certificates.  
3. Tap Configure input methods  
4. Tap the icon next to the input method that you  
would like to configure the settings for.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Security  
Settings  
.
2. Tap Clear credentials to remove all certificates.  
5. Based on your selection of input method, the  
appropriate settings will appear and are explained  
below.  
Language and Input  
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to  
display the menus. You can also set onscreen keyboard  
options.  
Android Keyboard settings  
From this menu you can set Android keyboard options.  
Language  
You can change the language used by your device by  
following these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Android keyboard  
3. The following options are available:  
Settings  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input Language  
Settings  
.
.
2. Tap a language from the list.  
• Input languages: tap on a language that you want to input.  
• Auto-capitalization: check this field to have the keyboard  
automatically capitalize the first letter of the first word after a  
period, the first word in a text field, and all words in name fields.  
Keyboards and Input Methods  
You can change the keyboard used by your device by  
following these steps:  
Changing Your Settings  
129  
       
• Vibrate on keypress: check this field to have the phone vibrate  
each time you touch a key on the keyboard.  
• Sound on keypress: check this field to play a sound each time  
you touch a key on the keyboard.  
Suggest Contact names: allows you to use names from your  
Contacts for suggestions and corrections.  
Bigram suggestions: uses the previous word to help improve  
suggestions.  
• Popup on keypress: check this field to show a small popup of  
each character that you type.  
Enable recorrections: allows you to see suggestions when  
you make recorrections.  
• Show settings key: allows you to select how the settings key  
will be displayed.  
Keypress vibration duration settings: allows you to set the  
time that each keypress vibrates. Drag the slider bar to the  
desired time.  
• Voice input key: check this field to be able to enter text in a  
message by talking.  
Keypress sound volume settings: If the keys are set to make  
a sound when pressed, this setting allows you to set the volume.  
• Add-on dictionaries: allows you to access dictionaries that  
have been downloaded from other sources.  
• Auto correction: allows you to correct mistyped words by  
using the spacebar and punctuation.  
Google voice typing settings  
From this menu you can set Samsung keypad options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Google voice typing  
3. The following options are available:  
Settings  
• Show correction suggestions: check this field to show  
suggested words in a field above the keyboard as you type.  
• Advanced settings: the following advanced settings are  
displayed:  
.
.
• Select input languages: tap on a language that you want to  
input. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a  
language from the list.  
Key popup dismiss delay: allows you to set the delay time  
that key pop-ups are dismissed. Select No delay or Default.  
130  
• Block offensive words  
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of  
your voice-input Google typing.  
:
tap to create a checkmark and enable  
7. Tap the Keypad sweeping field to be able to sweep the  
keypad and change from ABC to?123 mode. For more  
8. Tap the Character preview field to display small pop-up  
windows to verify the character you entered.  
9. Tap the Auto-capitalization field to enable automatic  
capitalization.  
Samsung Keypad settings  
From this menu you can set Samsung keypad options.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Samsung keypad  
.
10. Tap Voice input to activate the Voice input feature.  
Voice input is an experimental feature using Google’s  
networked speech recognition application.  
11. Tap Auto-full stop to activate the Auto-full stop feature.  
When you double space in a message, a period and  
space is added and the keyboard is placed into  
Uppercase mode so you can start the new sentence  
with a capital letter.  
.
3. Tap the Portrait keypad types field and select a text  
input method:  
Qwerty Keypad  
3x4 Keypad  
4. Tap the Input languages field and tap one of the  
languages.  
5. To use XT9 Predictive text method, tap XT9 to create a  
checkmark and enable the feature.  
12. Tap Tutorial for a short tutorial on using the Samsung  
keypad.  
6. If you are using XT9 Predictive text method, tap XT9  
advanced settings. For more information, refer to “XT9  
Advanced Settings” on page 132.  
Changing Your Settings  
131  
   
XT9 Advanced Settings  
The following XT9 Advanced settings are only available if the  
XT9 field has been selected.  
9. Tap the Auto-substitution field to automatically replace  
words that you are typing. This option will help for  
accidental misspellings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Samsung keypad  
3. Tap XT9 Advanced settings  
Settings  
10. Tap the Regional correction field. This option sets the  
device to automatically correct mistyped words  
according to normal spelling for your region.  
11. Tap the Recapture field. This option sets the device to  
re-display the word suggestion list when you select the  
wrong word from the list.  
.
.
.
4. Tap the Word completion field to enable word  
completion. Your phone will predict how to complete  
the word you have started.  
12. To add a new word to the T9 dictionary:  
Tap the XT9 my words field, then press  
Enter the new word in the Register to XT9 my words  
field, then tap Done  
13. To add words to substitute (for example youve  
becomes you’ve) tap XT9 auto-substitution  
14. A list of substitutions is displayed. If you don’t see the  
substitution you want, press Add, and then  
input the Shortcut word and Substitution word. Tap  
Done  
Add.  
5. Tap the Word completion point field to set how many  
letters should be entered before a prediction is made.  
6. Tap the Spell correction field. This option corrects  
typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible  
words that reflect the characters of the keys you  
tapped as well as the characters of nearby keys.  
7. Tap the Next word prediction field to enable word  
prediction for the next word.  
.
.
.
8. Tap the Auto-append field to automatically add  
predictions to the word you are typing.  
132  
Auto-capitalization: When enabled, automatically capitalizes  
the first letter of the first word in a sentence.  
Show complete trace: When enabled, briefly display the  
Swype trace.  
Swype Settings  
To configure Swype settings:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
2. Tap the icon next to Swype  
3. Tap one of the following Swype settings:  
Settings  
.
Word suggestion: When enabled, suggests possible matching  
words as you enter text.  
.
Speed vs. accuracy: Send the sensitivity of Swype text  
recognition.  
• Select Input Method: allows you to switch between different  
keyboard types.  
Reset Swype’s dictionary: Deletes all of the words you have  
added and loads the default dictionary.  
• How to Swype: provides tips on how to learn to use Swype.  
• Personal dictionary: Allows you to setup and manage your  
own dictionary.  
Version: View the current Swype software version.  
• Language Options: Allows you to set the language that you will  
be using.  
• Preferences: Allows you to view and modify the following  
Swype options:  
Audio feedback: When enabled, plays sounds as you enter  
text.  
Speech Settings  
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice  
Vibrate on keypress: check this field to have the phone  
vibrate each time you touch a key on the keyboard.  
Show tips: When enabled, the device displays helpful tips.  
Auto-spacing: When enabled, inserts spaces automatically  
when you pause entering text.  
search.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
Settings  
.
2. Tap Voice recognition and select either Google or  
Samsung powered by Vlingo as your Voice recognition  
engine.  
Changing Your Settings  
133  
   
3. Tap Voice search to configure:  
4. From the Text-to speech output screen, scroll down to  
access the following option:  
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.  
• SafeSearch: Set the sensitivity for filtering of explicit images  
from the results of your voice-input Google searches.  
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of  
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input  
Google searches.  
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.  
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis  
(available if voice data is installed).  
• Driving mode: Incoming calls and new notifications are read  
aloud when enabled.  
• Driving mode settings: allows you to select items that will be  
read out when received or activated.  
Voice output provides audible readout of text, for example,  
the contents of email messages.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
Settings  
Mouse/trackpad  
This option sets your Pointer speed.  
.
2. Tap Text-to-speech output and select the preferred TTS  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Language and input  
Settings  
engine. Google Text-to-speech is the default.  
.
3. Tap  
next to the preferred TTS engine configure the  
2. Tap Pointer speed then drag the slide to the right to go  
faster or to the left to go slower.  
following settings:  
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.  
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to  
view Open Source Licenses.  
3. Tap OK to save your setting.  
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech  
synthesis.  
134  
Automatic Restore  
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of  
your backed up settings and data will be restored.  
Backup and Reset  
Back Up My Data  
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of  
your settings and data.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
Settings  
Backup  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
Settings  
Backup  
2. Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic  
.
restoration of settings from the Google server.  
2. Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of  
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings  
to the Google server.  
Factory Data Reset  
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings  
to the factory default settings.  
Backup Account  
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the  
Backup account option is available.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
2. Tap Factory data reset  
Settings  
Backup  
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and reset  
Settings  
Backup  
The Factory data reset screen displays reset  
information.  
.
2. Tap Backup account and tap your Google Gmail account  
or tap Add account to set your Google Gmail account to  
be backed up to the Google server.  
3. Tap Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform  
the reset.  
Changing Your Settings  
135  
   
4. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the  
Month Day, and Year then tap Set  
5. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons to set the  
Hour and Minute then tap Set  
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.  
7. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour  
and Minute. Tap PM or AM, then tap Set  
Warning! Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data  
from your phone and internal SD card, including your  
Google account, system and application data and  
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not  
erase current system software, bundled  
,
.
.
applications, and external SD card files such as  
music and photos.  
,
.
8. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected  
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.  
Date and Time  
This menu allows you to change the current time and date  
displayed.  
9. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.  
Accessibility  
Accessibility services are special features to make using the  
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use  
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and time  
Settings  
Date  
.
2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network set  
the date and time.  
3. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the  
time zone.  
Note: You can download accessibility applications from the  
Play Store and manage their use here.  
Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Accessibility  
2. Tap TalkBack to activate the TalkBack feature.  
Settings  
the rest of the options.  
.
136  
   
Motion  
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback  
The Motion settings allow you to set up various Motion  
activation services.  
to help blind and low-vision users.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Motion.  
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,  
except passwords, including personal data and  
credit card numbers. It may also log your user  
interface interactions with the device.  
2. Tap Motion activation to activate the feature. A  
checkmark is displayed.  
3. The following options are available. Tap the ON/OFF  
icon on the top bar to activate each option.  
• Tilt to zoom: allows you to use the Tilt feature to reduce or  
3. Tap The power key ends calls option to create a  
checkmark if you want to press the power key to end  
calls. This will not turn off the screen.  
enlarge the screen when in Gallery or Browser. Tap Tilt to zoom,  
then tap Sensitivity and set the sensitivity using the slider. A  
checkmark appears in the Use motion box. Tap Learn about tilt  
for more information.  
4. Tap Auto-rotate screen to automatically rotate the  
screen from landscape to portrait when you rotate your  
phone.  
• Pan to edit: allows you to use the Panning feature to move  
icons from one page to another in Home and Application edit  
mode. Tap Pan to edit, then tap Sensitivity and set the  
sensitivity using the slider. Tap Learn about panning for more  
information.  
5. Tap Speak passwords option to activate this feature  
which reads out password information.  
6. Tap Tap and hold delay and then tap a delay time.  
Options are: Short, Medium, and Long.  
• Double tap: automatically prepares your phone for voice  
commands in Voice talk. Tap to activate. Tap Learn about  
double tap for more information.  
7. Tap Install Web scripts if want to allow apps to install  
scripts from Google that make their Web content more  
accessible. Tap Allow  
.
Changing Your Settings  
137  
   
Turn over to mute: allows you to mute incoming calls and  
sounds by turning your phone over. Tap to activate. Tap Learn  
about turn over for more information.  
Allow Mock Locations  
This setting is used by developers when developing  
location-based applications.  
Developer Options  
Use the Developer options to set options for application  
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.  
development.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Developer options  
Settings  
USB Debugging  
.
When enabled, allows debugging when the device is  
attached to a PC by a USB cable.  
2. Tap Allow mock locations to enable or disable the  
setting.  
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.  
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.  
Desktop Backup Password  
Protect the desktop with a backup password ID.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Developer options  
Settings  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Developer options  
2. Tap Desktop backup password  
Settings  
2. Tap USB debugging to enable or disable the setting.  
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.  
Development Device ID  
The identification number for your tablet when using it as a  
development tool displays in this field.  
.
.
3. In the Settings screen, enter the current full backup  
password, the new password for full backups, then  
enter the new password again.  
4. Tap Set backup password to save the password  
change.  
138  
         
User Interface Options  
Application Options  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Configure the user interface by setting the behavior for the  
way the screen behaves when using applications or  
displaying data.  
Developer options  
.
2. Tap Do not keep activities to destroy every activity as  
soon as the application is closed.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Developer options  
Settings  
.
3. Tap Limit background processes to set the number of  
processes that can run in the background. Options are:  
Standard limit, No background processes, and 1 to 4  
processes at most.  
2. Tap the check box next to each option to enable:  
• Strict mode: Makes the screen flash when applications  
perform long operations on the main thread.  
• Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched  
on the screen.  
4. Tap Show all ANRs to display a prompt when  
applications running in the background are not  
responding.  
• Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen.  
• Show screen updates: Areas of the screen flash when they  
update.  
About Phone  
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial  
information, and other phone information such as the model  
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,  
and software build number.  
• Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.  
• Force GPU rendering: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.  
• Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation  
(ranges from off to 10x).  
To access phone information:  
Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for  
transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).  
From the Home screen, tap  
phone  
Settings  
About  
.
Changing Your Settings  
139  
   
The following information displays:  
• Software update: allows you to update your phone software, if  
available. For more information, refer to “Software Update”  
on page 140.  
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this  
handset.  
• Build number: displays the software, build number.  
Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used  
for updates to the handset or support. For additional  
information please contact your AT&T service  
representative.  
• Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery  
(percentage), network, signal strength, mobile network type,  
service state, roaming status, mobile network state, the phone  
number for this device, IMEI number, IMEI SV, IP address, Wi-Fi  
MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, and Up time.  
• Legal information: This option displays information about  
Open source licenses as well as Google legal information. This  
information clearly provides copyright and distribution legal  
information and facts as well as Google Terms of Service,  
Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much more  
pertinent information as a reference. Read the information and  
Software Update  
The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your  
phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone  
software directly to your phone. The phone automatically  
updates with the latest available software when you access  
this option.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
phone Software update  
2. Tap Check for updates  
Settings  
About  
terms, then press  
to return to the Settings menu.  
.
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.  
• Android version: displays the android version loaded on this  
handset.  
.
3. At the Software update prompt, tap OK to continue.  
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if  
available), otherwise, when the Current software is up  
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on  
this handset.  
to date prompt is displayed, tap OK  
.
140  
 
5. When updating software, once the update file is  
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start  
screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If  
you want to resume the update before the selected  
time, tap Continue update  
.
Changing Your Settings  
141  
Section 9: Connections  
This section describes the various connections your phone  
can make including accessing the Internet with your  
Browser, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your PC.  
Zooming in and out of the Browser  
There are several ways to Zoom in and out on your browser.  
After tapping on a link or article, use one of these methods:  
Browser  
Tilting: Tap and hold the screen at two points then tilt the device  
back and forth to reduce or enlarge the screen. You must first  
enable motion in the Settings section. For more information, refer  
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section  
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to  
the basic features.  
Accessing the Mobile Web  
To access the Browser:  
Double tap: Quickly tap the screen twice on the web page to  
zoom in or out.  
Pinching: Sweep in opposite directions at the same time to zoom  
in or out (use a pinching-in or pinching-out motion).  
From the Home screen, tap Web  
.
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.  
Browser Options  
1. From the home page, press  
following options:  
Navigating with the Browser  
1. To select an item, tap an entry.  
to access the  
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with  
your finger in an up or down motion.  
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across  
a web page.  
• Forward: forwards the browser to another web page.  
• New window: displays a new window so you can browse  
multiple URLs. For more information, refer to “Adding and  
Deleting Windows” on page 144.  
4. To return to the previous page, press  
.
• Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list  
142  
       
• Add shortcut to home: allows you to add a shortcut to your  
Home screen.  
• Print: allows you to print the screen or web page on a  
Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.  
• Settings: allows you to modify your web settings. For more  
information, refer to “Browser Settings” on page 147.  
• Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a  
message.  
Enter a URL  
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.  
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.  
• Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.  
• Desktop view: allows you to assign the browser to display the  
current page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display  
as it would appear on a desktop computer).  
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these  
steps:  
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.  
• Save for offline reading: allows you to store the current page  
in memory so that it can be read later even if you loose your  
Internet connection.  
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.  
The website displays.  
• Brightness and color: allows you to manually adjust the  
screen brightness and set one of four available color levels  
associated with different power saving profiles. The higher the  
power saving level, the less intense the on-screen color  
saturation.  
Search the Internet  
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these  
steps:  
1. From the AT&T/YAHOO! homepage, tap the Search  
field.  
Note: If the Automatic brightness feature is enabled (Settings  
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen  
Display  
Brightness), you can not modify the  
keypad and tap  
.
browser’s brightness setting.  
3. Tap a link to view the website.  
• Downloads: displays the download history.  
Connections  
143  
       
Adding and Deleting Windows  
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.  
To add a new window, follow these steps:  
Note: The incognito icon appears in the upper-left of the new  
browser window while you are in this mode.  
1. From your browser, press  
New window.  
To exit from the incognito window:  
2
A new browser window is opened.  
1. From your browser window, tap  
(New  
window).  
2
2. Tap  
to see thumbnails of all open windows.  
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the  
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.  
4. Tap at the top right corner of the web page  
thumbnail to delete the window.  
incognito window.  
3. Tap  
window.  
next to the incognito listing to delete this  
Going Incognito  
Adding Bookmarks  
1. From any webpage, tap  
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites  
outside of the normal browsing. Pages viewed in this  
incognito window won’t appear within your browser history  
or search history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on  
your device.  
Add bookmark.  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the  
bookmark, the URL address, and the Folder.  
3. Tap Save  
.
4. Saved to bookmarks will appear at the bottom of the  
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your  
page.  
device after you exit the incognito mode.  
To add a new incognito window:  
1. From your browser window, tap  
2
.
2. A new browser window displays.  
144  
       
• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.  
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.  
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the  
bookmark. For more information, refer to “Editing  
Bookmarks” on page 145.  
Using Bookmarks  
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to  
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs  
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in  
the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can  
also view your Most visited websites and view your History.  
• Add shortcut to home: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked  
webpage to your phone’s Home screen.  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
.
The Bookmarks page is displayed.  
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth,  
Email, Facebook, Gmail, Google+, Messaging, Social Hub, or  
Wi-Fi Direct.  
2. Press  
to display the following options:  
• List/Thumbnail view: You can select Thumbnail view  
(default) to see a thumbnail of the webpage with the name  
listed, or you can select List view to see a list of the bookmarks  
with Name and URL listed.  
• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a  
message.  
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more  
information, refer to “Deleting Bookmarks” on page 146.  
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.  
• Create folder: Creates a new bookmark folder.  
• Change order: Allows you to move pages around on the  
Bookmarks page. Touch and hold a bookmark icon, then move  
it to the desired location.  
Editing Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark  
• Move to folder: Allows you to move a page to a folder.  
• Delete: Allows you to delete one or more bookmarks.  
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and  
hold a bookmark for the following options:  
you want to edit.  
2. Tap Edit bookmark  
.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the  
bookmark or the URL.  
Connections  
145  
   
4. Tap Save  
.
Using your History  
The History list provides you with a list of the most recently  
visited websites. These entries can be used to return to  
previously unmarked web pages.  
Deleting Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark  
you want to delete.  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
History.  
2. Tap Delete bookmark  
.
A list of your most recently visited websites is  
displayed with Name and URL address.  
3. At the Delete confirmation window, tap OK  
.
Emptying the Cookies  
2. Tap on a category such as Today or Most visited  
.
A cookie is a small file which is placed on your phone by a  
website during navigation. In addition to containing some  
site-specific information, it can also contain some personal  
information (such as a username and password) which can  
pose a security risk if not properly managed. You can clear  
these cookies from your phone at any time.  
3. Tap any entry to display the webpage.  
4. Press  
Clear history to delete the History list.  
Saved Pages  
The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites  
that you have saved.  
1. From the Home webpage, press  
Settings  
1. From the Home webpage, tap  
Saved pages.  
Privacy and security Clear all cookie data  
.
A list of your saved webpages is displayed with Name  
and URL address. The webpages that have been visited  
the most will appear at the top.  
2. At the Clear prompt, tap OK to delete the cookies or tap  
Cancel to exit.  
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.  
146  
   
• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.  
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from  
any previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to  
disable this function.  
Browser Settings  
To make adjustments in your browser settings, follow these  
steps:  
1. Tap Web  
Settings.  
2. The following options are available:  
• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled  
out forms. Tap OK to complete the process.  
General  
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your  
location.  
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web  
browser.  
• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites.  
Tap OK to complete the process.  
• Form auto-fill: allows you to fill in web forms with a single tap.  
• Auto-fill text: allows you to enter text to be used in the Form  
auto-fill feature.  
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for  
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or  
passwords. Tap OK to complete the process.  
Accessibility  
Privacy and security  
• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap OK to  
complete the process.  
• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap OK to  
complete the process.  
• Force zoom: allows you to override the website’s request to  
control zoom.  
• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security  
issue with the current website.  
Text size: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text size  
using a slider bar, set the zoom amount on double tap using a  
slider bar, and minimize the font size using a slider bar.  
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and  
read cookies from your device.  
Connections  
147  
Inverted rendering: allows you to preview a website page, select  
Inverted rendering (black becomes white and vice versa), and  
adjust the Contrast using a slider bar.  
• Open pages in overview: Shows an overview of newly opened  
web pages.  
• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much  
of the screen as possible.  
Advanced  
• Block pop-ups: Prevents popup advertisement or windows  
from appearing onscreen. Remove the checkmark to disable  
this function.  
• Select search engine: allows you to set your default search  
engine to Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.  
• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate  
page and displayed behind the current one. Remove the  
checkmark to disable this function.  
Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.  
• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings  
to default.  
• Enable JavaScript: Enables Javascript for the current Web  
page. Without this feature, some pages may not display  
properly. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as  
Adobe Flash.  
Bandwidth management  
• Preload search results: Allows the browser to preload high  
confidence search results in the background to help speed up  
searches.  
• Load images: Allows web page images to be loaded along  
with the other text components of a loaded website.  
Labs  
• Default storage: Allows you to set your default storage to  
Phone or Memory Card.  
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual  
websites.  
• Quick controls: allows you to open quick controls and hide the  
app and URL bars by swiping your thumb from the left or right  
edge of the screen.  
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium,  
or Close.  
148  
• Full screen: allows you to access Full screen mode and hide  
the status bar.  
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
The network names and security settings (Open  
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi  
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.  
Wi-Fi  
About Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to  
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local  
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11  
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.  
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and  
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can  
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or  
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and  
password).  
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.  
Note: When you select an open network, you will be  
automatically connected to the network.  
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.  
Manually add your new network connection  
1. Tap Add network  
.
Turning Wi-Fi On  
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning  
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to  
compatible in-range WAPs.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON  
2. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your  
Wireless Access Point.  
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This  
must match the current security setting on your target  
WAP.  
Settings.  
4. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s  
password.  
.
Connections  
149  
   
5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to  
Wi-Fi Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a  
your target WAP.  
glance:  
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously  
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not  
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset  
your device back to its factory default settings.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active but there is a  
communication issue with the target Wireless  
Access Point (WAP).  
Turning Wi-Fi Off  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
Displays when connected to another device using  
Wi-Fi Direct. For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi  
Direct” on page 151.  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF  
.
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings  
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set  
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and  
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and  
reduce your use times.  
up many of your device’s Wi-Fi service, including:  
Setting your Wi-Fi sleep policy  
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network  
Viewing your device’s MAC Address  
Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
2. Tap Scan  
.
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Advanced  
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.  
Settings  
Wi-Fi.  
.
150  
8. The other device has 2 minutes to tap OK for the  
connection to be made.  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
9. Once connected, the other device will show as  
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the  
icon will display at the top of your screen.  
10. To change your Device name and Password, press  
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi  
Device name  
11. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press  
Help  
.
Direct.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi  
Direct field, to turn Wi-Fi Direct ON  
3. At the Wi-Fi Direct prompt, tap OK  
4. From the Settings screen, tap Wi-Fi Direct  
5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 on the other device you want to  
Settings  
More....  
Sharing Information with Connected Device  
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the  
connected device, follow these steps:  
1. View the information that you want to share. For  
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in  
your camera viewer or My files folder, then tap the  
Share, Share via, or Send via option.  
.
.
.
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,  
may be different.  
2. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct option.  
6. On your phone, tap Scan  
.
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,  
Android_49ba.  
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.  
7. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,  
4. The other device will receive a prompt to receive the  
tap on it.  
information and must tap OK  
.
Connections  
151  
 
5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive  
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been  
received. The file can be found in My files in the  
ShareViaWifi folder.  
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the  
updated application from the Play Store.  
5. Read the License Agreement and tap Accept to  
continue.  
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and  
shared folder information may differ.  
6. At the Welcome screen, tap OK  
.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi  
7. At the Initial Setting screen, tap Yes if you want AT&T  
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery  
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T  
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi  
connections, and track your data use.  
Smart Wi-Fi to automatically connect to any hotspot  
that is available for public use. Otherwise, tap No  
.
8. Follow the onscreen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Wi-Fi  
AT&T Smart  
.
to www.att.com/smartwifi  
.
Bluetooth  
Note: The first time you use the AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you will  
need to download the application from the Market. For  
About Bluetooth  
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that  
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth  
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and  
2. At the Install screen, tap Ok  
.
152  
       
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and  
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is  
usually up to approximately 30 feet.  
Displays when Bluetooth is on but is not  
connected to a Bluetooth device.  
Bluetooth Settings  
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of  
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,  
including:  
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth  
communication and description  
Turning Bluetooth On and Off  
To turn Bluetooth on:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON  
Settings.  
.
When active,  
appears within the Status area.  
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other  
Bluetooth devices  
To turn Bluetooth off:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings  
.
Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address  
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the  
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Settings.  
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON  
.
Bluetooth Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status  
at a glance:  
3. Tap Bluetooth  
To change your Bluetooth name:  
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
name  
.
Displays when Bluetooth is active.  
Device  
.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and  
communicating.  
2. Enter a new name.  
3. Tap OK to complete the rename process.  
Connections  
153  
To make your device visible:  
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
Pairing Bluetooth Devices  
Visible  
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted  
connections between your device and another Bluetooth  
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,  
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the  
discovery and authentication process.  
time-out  
.
Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other  
devices for pairing and communication.  
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility  
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
to time-out.  
Note: Your device is visible for up to 120 seconds (2 minutes).  
2. Tap Scan for devices. Your device will display a list of  
discovered in-range Bluetooth devices.  
This value appears as a countdown within this field.  
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.  
To show received files:  
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK  
5. The external device will then have to also accept the  
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.  
Once successfully paired to an external device,  
appears within the Status area.  
.
From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
received files  
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.  
Show  
.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other  
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations  
may be different, and functions such as transfer or  
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth  
compatible devices.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan for devices  
to search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible  
devices such as headsets, devices, printers, and  
computers.  
154  
 
Deleting a paired device (unpair)  
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time  
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices  
will continue to recognize their partnership and  
exchange information without having to re-enter a  
passcode again.  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection  
between the device and your phone, but retains the  
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to  
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the  
connection information again.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
Disconnecting a paired device  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the  
icon  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection  
between the device and your phone, but retains the  
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to  
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the  
connection information again.  
next to the paired device that you want to unpair.  
3. Tap Unpair to unpair the device from your phone.  
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth  
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,  
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or  
other items using a Bluetooth connection.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously  
paired device.  
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be  
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.  
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.  
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur  
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of  
your phone or it is powered off.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
3. Press Import/Export  
Contacts  
.
Send namecard via.  
Connections  
155  
 
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via  
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each  
entry you select.  
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the  
device, you can also access the files directory from the  
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.  
5. Tap  
.
6. Tap Bluetooth  
.
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.  
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a  
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.  
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and  
communicating for the pairing to be successful.  
1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files  
from or to the memory card to your PC.  
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
USB utilities  
3. On your phone, tap Connect storage to PC  
Settings  
More...  
notifications list.  
.
PC Connections  
.
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC  
data cable using various USB connection modes. When you  
connect the device to a PC, you can synchronize files with  
Windows Media Player, transfer data to and from your device  
directly, or use the Kies air application to access your PC  
wirelessly.  
4. Connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC  
using a PC data cable.  
5. A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.  
6. On your phone, tap Turn on USB storage  
7. Tap OK  
Your phone will appear on your PC as a removable disk.  
8. On the PC pop-up, click Open folder to view files  
9. Copy files between your PC and your memory card.  
.
.
.
156  
         
8. On your PC, the Kies air screen is displayed. On your  
phone, the icon appears at the top of your screen.  
Kies Air  
Kies Air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with  
your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi  
network. You can view and share call logs, videos, photos,  
music, bookmarks, ringtones, and even send SMS messages  
from your PC.  
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to view and share  
information between your phone and PC.  
10. To exit the Kies air application, tap Stop on your phone,  
then close out the web browser on your PC.  
To use the Kies air, follow these steps:  
1. Sign onto the same Wi-Fi network from your phone and  
from your PC.  
NFC  
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when  
you touch your device with another compatible device. This  
is used for applications such as Android Beam. For  
information on NFC and NFC related features, see “NFC” on  
2. On your phone, from the Home screen, tap  
Kies air  
3. From the Kies air homescreen, tap Start  
A web URL is displayed on your phone screen.  
.
.
4. From your PC, enter the URL in your web browser.  
5. On your phone, an Access Request prompt is  
displayed. Tap Allow to continue.  
6. Tap the Remember for today checkbox if you will be  
using Kies air with the same PC later.  
7. From your PC, a security warning may be displayed  
asking if you want to run this application. Click Run to  
continue.  
Connections  
157  
     
Section 10: Applications  
This section contains a description of each application that is  
available in the Applications Menu, its function, and how to  
navigate through that particular application. If the application  
is already described in another section of this user manual,  
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.  
Note: To view more information about DLNA certified products  
.
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,  
can also add an application icon as a Primary Shortcut  
that will display on all Home screens. If you add an  
application as a primary shortcut, the application icon will  
not be displayed in the Applications menu. For more  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
The AllShare screen is displayed.  
3. To share media, tap Videos Photos, or Music and tap  
on the media that you would like to share.  
4. At the Select device screen, any devices that you can  
share with are displayed.  
AllShare  
.
,
5. Tap on a device to share media.  
6. Tap the Remote device tab at the top of the screen.  
All devices that you can receive media from are  
displayed.  
AllShare  
AllShare allows your phone to stream photos, music and  
videos from its memory to other Digital Living Network  
Alliance (DLNA) certified devices. Your phone can also play  
digital content streamed from other DLNA certified devices.  
7. Tap a device name.  
Media that you can receive from the other device is  
listed.  
158  
     
8. Tap an item that you want to stream to your phone.  
9. Press Settings to configure the following  
settings:  
• Device name: defaults to your phone. Use the keypad to enter  
a new Media server if desired, and tap Save  
3. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the  
application from the Play Store.  
.
AT&T Code Scanner  
AT&T Code Scanner allows you to scan two-dimensional (QR  
and datamatrix codes) and one-dimensional (UPC and EAN)  
barcodes found in magazines, stores, and online.  
• Share videos/photos/music: allows you to restrict what is  
shared from your phone. Tap the items you want to share.  
• Upload from other devices: allows you set the phone to select  
how uploads from other devices are started. Tap Always  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Code Scanner  
accept  
,
Always ask, or Always reject  
.
.
• Default memory: allows you to have media saved to your  
Phone or Memory Card. Tap an option.  
Note: The first time you use the AT&T Code Scanner, you will  
need to download the updated application from the  
Market. When the Market page displays, tap Update. For  
• Subtitles: allows you to see subtitles on shared media.  
Depending on the setting you changed, a pop-up  
screen may display to restart AllShare. Tap Yes to  
continue.  
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already  
Amazon Kindle  
This application allows you to download books, magazines,  
and newspapers to read on your phone.  
3. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to  
continue.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Amazon Kindle  
.
2. At the Kindle display, tap Get Kindle for Android  
.
Applications  
159  
           
4. At the My Profile screen, tap OK to allow your location  
information to be used or tap Don’t Allow to bypass.  
5. Enter your information in the My Profile section.  
6. Tap ON to activate your profile. This allows the  
application to customize your results. For example,  
your zip code may help to deliver a coupon for a  
restaurant in your neighborhood. You can toggle the  
activation button between ON and OFF.  
AT&T FamilyMap  
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to  
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless  
phone or PC and know that your family's location information  
is secure and private.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T FamilyMap  
.
Note: The first time you use AT&T Family Map, you will need to  
download the application from the Market. For more  
7. Tap Done  
8. Read the tutorial and tap Next until you are at the end  
of the tutorial. Tap Finish  
.
.
2. At the AT&T FamilyMap Sign In webpage, enter your  
9. Position your phone approximately 2-5 inches from the  
barcode. Ensure that the barcode is completely within  
the window. Keep your phone steady for best results.  
10. The scanner will automatically scan the barcode. It  
may take several seconds.  
Phone Number and Password in the appropriate fields  
and tap Submit  
.
Note: To sign up for service, visit http://www.att.com/familymap  
for more information.  
11. After the scan, tap Yes to open the web page to view  
the information on the barcode that was scanned.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
160  
   
Using AT&T Navigator  
AT&T Navigator  
Although your phone does not come with left and right  
softkeys, these are available as on-screen buttons so you  
can activate their corresponding features.  
1. Select an option and follow the on-screen instructions  
to activate a Navigator feature.  
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-  
driven applications. These programs not only allow you to  
achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local  
searches.  
Important! You must have a data plan to use this feature.  
• Maps: provides access to 2D and 3D maps for both your  
current location and for several categories of locations such  
as Airports and Contacts.  
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.  
• Drive To: lets you get driving directions from wherever you are  
Launching AT&T Navigator  
to wherever you’re going. Choices include:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Navigator  
Set Up Home: allows you to set up your Home address.  
Set Up Work: allows you to set up your Work address.  
Favorites: displays your favorite (marked) GPS navigation sites.  
Recents: displays your recently entered locations.  
Airports: allows you to use either local airports based on  
current a GPS location or manually enter the 3-letter airport  
code or name.  
.
2. Read the Terms of Service and tap Accept to  
acknowledge the terms of use.  
The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the  
necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T  
Navigator main screen displays.  
3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to  
purchase.  
Contacts: allows you to access a contact to get address  
information. When the prompt is available, tap Resume Trip to  
continue.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Applications  
161  
       
• Voice search (located at bottom of display): tap  
your voice to search for directions, such as “Drive home” and  
“Search gas station”.  
to use  
Obtaining Driving Directions  
Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get real-  
time driving directions to selected locations or  
establishments based on your current location.  
Using a Physical Address  
• Places: allows you to use Google Maps and your location to  
help you find Restaurants, Coffee, Bars, Hotels, Attractions,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
AT&T Navigator  
Drive To  
.
2. Type the address into the Drive To search bar or tap  
to use your voice to enter a destination.  
3. If typing in the address, enter the address, city, state,  
and zip code. As you type, similar addresses will begin  
to appear. When the address you want is displayed, tap  
it.  
• Extras: allows you to search for local movies, see the local  
weather, and check local Commute Alerts.  
• Search bar (located at top of display): allows you to search  
for the address by either speaking it or by entering the  
information manually. This function lets you search for locations  
from options such as: Food/Coffee, Gas Stations, Gas By Price,  
Banks/ATMs, WiFi Spots, Parking Lots Hotels & Motels, Movie  
Theaters, Car Rentals, and more.  
The destination is displayed.  
4. Tap the destination.  
2. Press  
to exit.  
5. Tap Map Share, or Search Nearby to refine or improve  
,
your search results. Follow both the on-screen and  
audio directions.  
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.  
162  
4. Enter the second number.  
AT&T Ready2Go  
5. To view the result, tap equals (  
=).  
AT&T Ready2Go allows you to quickly and easily setup your  
phone by using the web browser on your PC. You can set-up  
email accounts, import contacts, set wallpaper, configure Wi-  
Fi and many more features. For more information, refer to  
6. To view calculator history, tap  
located at the  
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past  
calculations is displayed. Tap  
the calculator keypad.  
again to display  
Clear  
Text size. Tap  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi  
7. To clear the calculator history, press  
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery  
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T  
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi  
connections, and track your data use. For more information,  
history  
.
8. To change the text size, press  
Small, Medium, or Large.  
Calendar  
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by  
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act  
as a reminder, if necessary.  
Calculator  
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The  
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,  
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also  
keeps a history of recent calculations.  
To access the Calendar:  
1. From the Home screen, Calendar  
.
2. The following options are available:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Calculator  
.
• Month: the calendar displays the selected month with today’s  
date highlighted. At the bottom of the calendar, scheduled  
events display in the order that they occur.  
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric  
keys.  
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the  
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.  
Applications  
163  
           
• Week: the calendar displays the selected week with today’s  
time and date highlighted.  
• Create event: allows you to create a new event for any day or  
time period.  
• Day: the calendar displays the selected day with any events  
highlighted.  
• Go to: allows you to go to any date on your calendar.  
Today: takes you to today’s date, if you are not already there.  
• Search: allows you to search through your calendar for a  
particular word or words.  
• List: the Event List displays all events that you have added for  
all dates in the order that they appear.  
• Delete: displays the event list, where you can select events to  
delete.  
Calendar View  
Event List  
• Settings: displays the following calendar settings:  
Previous Month  
Next Month  
Calendars: displays all calendars they you have created.  
Default view: allows you to set the default view to Month,  
Week, Day, or List.  
Current Day  
Days with  
Events  
Day view: allows you to set the Day view to display with times  
listed or as a list of events. Select Time grid or Event List.  
First day of week: allows you to set the first day of the week to  
Sunday or Monday. This will affect how the Month view calendar  
is displayed.  
Events for  
Selected Day  
Calendar Options  
Hide declined events: will not display events you have  
received from others if you have declined them.  
Hide birthdays from Contacts: will not display the birthdays  
of your contacts.  
From any Calendar view, press  
to display the  
following options:  
164  
Lock time zone: allows you to lock the event times and dates  
to the time zone that you select.  
• Delete: allows you to delete any event. Tap OK at the prompt.  
• Send via: allows you to send event information via Bluetooth,  
Email, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
Select time zone: allows you to set the time zone to which  
event times and dates will be locked.  
Camera  
Set alerts & notifications: allows you to turn on audio alerts,  
set Status bar notification, or turn alerts off.  
Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a  
JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take  
videos.  
Vibration: allows you to set the Event notification tone to vibrate  
Always, Only in Silent mode or Never.  
Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for the Event  
notification tone.  
Clock  
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the  
World Clock, set a stopwatch, and use a timer.  
Calendar sync: allows you to sync your calendar with other  
accounts such as email or social accounts.  
Alarm  
Event List  
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific  
time.  
The Event List displays all events that you have added for all  
dates in the order that they appear.  
1. From the Calendar, tap the List icon.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Create alarm. The following options display:  
• Time: tap the ( or ( to set the new time for the event, at  
Clock  
Alarm  
+)  
-)  
2. Tap any event to display it.  
which time an alarm will sound.  
3. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the  
alarm by tapping days that you want the alarm to repeat. Tap  
the Repeat weekly checkbox to repeat your setup every week.  
• Edit: allows you the change the Event name, date, time,  
location, participants, alarm, alarm details, and description. Tap  
Save  
.
Applications  
165  
         
• Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when  
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and  
Briefing).  
Setting the Snooze Feature  
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,  
Z
Z
touch and drag the  
icon in any direction. Snooze  
• Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.  
• Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the alarm  
must first be set in the alarm settings. For more  
is activated. Select Sounds or Go to My files  
.
Deleting Alarms  
• Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30  
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times).  
• Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the best  
time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone somewhere on  
your bed then the phone's movement sensor (also known as  
accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work from any part of the  
bed. Set the Duration and the Tone.  
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Delete  
Clock  
Alarm  
.
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green  
checkmark will appear next to each selection.  
3. Tap Delete  
.
World Clock  
• Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The  
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.  
2. Tap Save to store the alarm details.  
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in  
other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in  
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around  
the world.  
Turning Off an Alarm  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
clock. The clock for your time zone is displayed.  
2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World Clock.  
Clock  
World  
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and drag the  
icon in any direction.  
166  
     
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want  
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to  
enter a city to search for.  
3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch.  
4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times  
recorded.  
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will  
display.  
Timer  
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer  
to count down to an event based on a preset time length  
(hours, minutes, and seconds).  
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,  
then tap DST settings  
.
6. Select Automatic Off  
,
,
1 hour, or 2 hours  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Clock  
Timer.  
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, the sun symbol on  
the World Clock listing will appear orange.  
Deleting a World Clock Entry  
2. The min field is highlighted and set to 1 minute. Use  
the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.  
3. Tap the hr field to set hours if desired. As you tap  
different fields, they will become highlighted.  
4. Tap the sec field to set seconds.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
clock Delete  
2. Tap the city clocks you wish to delete.  
Clock  
World  
.
5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the  
timer.  
3. Tap Delete  
.
6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to  
set the timer back to the original setting.  
Stopwatch  
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Clock  
Stopwatch  
Desk clock  
.
You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and  
you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location,  
and weather conditions when it is docked.  
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a  
unit of time per lap.  
Applications  
167  
     
1. From the Home screen, tap  
clock  
The default Desk clock is displayed.  
2. Tap to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.  
3. To make changes, tap Settings  
Clock  
Desk  
Contacts  
.
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name  
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can  
be sorted by name, entry, or group.  
.
4. The following options are displayed while in full-screen  
mode:  
Downloads  
The Downloads application allows you to manage all of your  
downloads from the Market and the Browser.  
• Hide status bar: when this is checked, the status bar is hidden  
from view.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Downloads  
.
• Wallpaper: tap to select Desk clock wallpaper from Default,  
Gallery, or Same as home screen.  
All of your downloads are listed.  
2. Tap the Internet Downloads tab to see all of the  
downloads you have made from the Browser.  
3. Tap the Other Downloads tab to see all other  
downloads.  
• Time/Calendar display: when this is checked, the time, day,  
and date is displayed. Tap to uncheck.  
• AccuWeather: when this is checked, the location,  
temperature, and weather condition is displayed. Tap to  
uncheck.  
4. Tap Sort by size to see your downloads sorted in size  
order.  
• Brightness: sets your Desk clock brightness by dragging the  
slider bar to the desired level.  
5. Tap Sort by date to see your downloads sorted in date  
order.  
168  
     
Facebook  
Gmail  
You can use the Facebook app to go directly to your  
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured  
when you first set up your phone. Depending on your  
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically  
synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more  
Facebook account rather than accessing it from the Browser.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Facebook  
.
2. If you already have a facebook account, tap on the  
Email and Password fields and enter your information  
using the on-screen keyboard, then tap Login  
Google +  
.
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
– or –  
If you don’t have a Facebook account, tap Sign up and  
follow the on-screen instructions.  
Gallery  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and  
IM  
Instant Messaging allows you to send and receive instant  
messages using Windows Live Messenger, Google Talk, or  
Yahoo! Messenger communities. For more information, refer  
Applications  
169  
             
Sharing your Location with Friends  
1. From the Latitude map screen, tap FRIENDS LIST to  
display your Latitude friends. At first, only your name is  
displayed.  
Kies air  
Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with  
your phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi  
network. You can view call logs, videos, photos, bookmarks,  
IMs, and even send SMS messages from your home  
2. Tap  
3. Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address  
4. Tap a contact or enter an email address and tap Add  
friends  
5. At the Send sharing requests prompt, tap Yes  
.
+
.
Latitude  
.
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your  
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your  
location.  
.
Your friend will receive an email or text message with  
your location marked on a map. They will also receive  
instructions on how to view your location from the web  
or use Latitude on their phone or tablet provided it is  
available. Once they acknowledge your request, their  
location will display on your phone. They can share  
their location from their computer, phone, or tablet. For  
You must first set up your phone to use wireless networks to  
help pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when  
Wi-Fi is enabled.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Latitude  
.
more information, go to http://www.google.com/latitude  
6. To view the map, tap MAP VIEW  
Latitude Options  
From the map display, press  
following options:  
.
Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 30  
meters.  
.
to display the  
170  
     
• Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from  
the map.  
What’s New: allows you to see the latest changes in Play Store  
and update your app.  
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.  
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a  
starting point.  
About: displays general information about Google maps such  
as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received,  
Free memory, etc.  
Feedback: allows you to send feedback to Google.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions,  
Privacy Policy, o r Legal Notices information. Select the desired  
information from the pop-up menu.  
• Layers: Layers are additional items that you can have  
displayed on your map. They include Traffic, Satellite, Terrain,  
Transit Lines, Latitude, My Maps, Bicycling, and Wikipedia.  
• Settings: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you  
can receive help on Google Maps.  
• Help: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you  
can receive help on Google Maps.  
Display: allows you to display the Zoom Buttons and Scale Bar  
on the screen.  
Live TV  
Cache: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when  
not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles.  
Location settings: allows you to manage the settings for your  
Background location reporting, Location history, Latitude  
location sharing, and Check-ins.  
Live TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch  
your favorite TV shows using your handset. For more  
Maps  
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and  
satellite maps and local business information, including  
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You  
can also post public messages about a location and track  
your friends.  
Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that  
aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or  
disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it.  
Applications  
171  
         
in poor weather  
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have an active  
data connection. The Maps application does not  
cover every country or city.  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
Using Maps  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Enabling a Location Source  
Maps  
.
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search  
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To  
enable the location source you must enable the wireless  
network, or enable the GPS satellites.  
A map will display with your location in the very center.  
2. Icons for the following options are displayed at the  
bottom of the screen:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Location services  
Settings  
Search: allows you to search for a place of  
interest.  
.
2. Tap the GPS satellites field. A green checkmark will  
display next to the field.  
Directions: displays navigation directions to a  
location from a starting point.  
Note: Selecting GPS satellites allows you to locate places of  
interest at the street-level. However, this also requires a  
clear view of the sky and uses more battery power.  
Places:findRestaurants,Cafes,Bars,Attractions,  
and other businesses.  
Layers: additional items that you can have  
displayed on your map. They include Traffic,  
Satellite, Terrain, Transit Lines, Latitude, My  
Maps, Bicycling, and Wikipedia.  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
172  
3. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Help: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you  
• Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from  
the map.  
can receive help on Google Maps.  
Media Hub  
• Settings: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you  
can receive help on Google Maps.  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite  
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For  
Display: allows you to display the Zoom Buttons and Scale Bar  
on the screen.  
Memo  
Cache: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when  
not using WiFi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles.  
Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that  
aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or  
disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it.  
What’s New: allows you to see the latest changes in Play Store  
and update your app.  
This feature allows you to create a memo and send it via  
Bluetooth, Email, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Memo  
.
2. To create a new memo, tap Create memo  
.
– or –  
Press  
Create.  
About: displays general information about Google maps such  
as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received,  
Free memory, etc.  
3. Type your Memo using the keypad and tap Save  
.
The memo will display in the memo list.  
4. To send a Memo, touch and hold the Memo in the  
Feedback: allows you to send feedback to Google.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions,  
Privacy Policy, o r Legal Notices information. Select the desired  
information from the pop-up menu.  
Memo list.  
5. Tap Send  
.
6. Tap Bluetooth  
,
Email  
,
Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
Applications  
173  
     
• Sync memo: allows you to sync your memos Google Docs or  
send individual memos.  
Note: Email will appear as an option only after you have setup  
• PIN lock: allows you to set a PIN lock so that a PIN must be  
entered before reading a memo.  
7. Enter the recipient information and tap Send. For more  
8. To modify a Memo, tap the pencil icon in the top right  
Messaging  
You can send and receive different types of messages. For  
corner of the Memo. Edit the Memo then tap Save  
.
Messenger  
9. From the Memo list, press  
to display the following  
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into  
a simple group conversation. When you get a new  
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your  
options:  
• Create: allows you to create a new memo.  
• Delete: allows you to delete one or all of your memos.  
• Search: allows you to search your memos for a particular word  
or words.  
Mini diary  
The Mini Diary allows you to keep a diary of your daily  
activities and also attach pictures. You can publish your diary  
entries to Facebook and MySpace.  
• Send: allows you to send one or several of your memos at one  
time. You can send via Bluetooth, Email, Messaging, or Wi-Fi  
Direct.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mini diary  
.
• Sort by: allows you to sort by Date or Color.  
• SNS log in: allows you to log into your Facebook, Twitter, or  
LinkedIn accounts.  
2. Tap Create diary to start a new diary entry.  
3. Tap the Tap to add photo field to add a photo.  
174  
         
4. To take a new picture, tap Camera. To add a photo from  
your Gallery, tap Gallery  
5. Tap the Tap to add text field to add text to your diary  
then tap Done  
6. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a memo then tap  
Done  
7. Tap the Add location field to add your location then tap  
Done  
8. Tap Save  
• Publish: allows you to publish your diary to Facebook.  
• Send via: allows you to send your Diary entry by Email or  
Messaging.  
.
.
11. At the Mini Diary screen, press  
to display the  
following options:  
• Search: allows you to search your diaries for a particular word  
or words.  
.
.
• List by: allows you to sort by Date or Location.  
• Delete all: allows you to delete all diary entries.  
• Settings: allows you to select Auto update which will update  
your Selected city based on GPS.  
.
9. The dairy entry will be added to your Mini Diary with  
today’s date.  
10. While in a diary entry that has been previously saved,  
MOG Music  
press  
to display the following options:  
MOG Music gives you access to over 11 million songs and  
provides unlimited listening and unlimited downloads. MOG  
Music also has a desktop service, which is available for  
access from any desktop PC or browser. You can download  
any song or album straight to your mobile phone for a low  
monthly fee. You can also access the MOG Music radio. For  
• Create: allows you to create a new diary entry.  
• Delete: allows you to delete a diary entry.  
• Go to: allows you to go to a selected date on the Calendar.  
• Change photo: allows you to change your photo if you have  
already added one. This option only displays if a photo has  
been added.  
• Delete photo: allows you to delete your photo. This option only  
displays if a photo has been added.  
Applications  
175  
 
• external_sd: this folder displays all of the files that you have on  
your memory card.  
Movies  
The Movies application allows you to rent movies to watch  
• Bluetooth: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.  
Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your  
Music Player  
Music allows you to play music files that you have stored on  
your phone and memory card. You can also create playlists.  
phone is configured.  
myAT&T  
The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own  
AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check  
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change  
your rate plan.  
My files  
My files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,  
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in  
one convenient location.  
Initial Setup  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My files  
.
myAT&T  
.
2. The following folders display:  
2. Sign into your Google Account. If you haven’t set up an  
• DCIM: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken  
by the device. Tap DCIM Camera to view the picture or  
3. After signing into your Google Account, the Android  
Market displays the myAT&T application.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the app.  
• Android: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android  
applications.  
Using myAT&T  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
myAT&T  
.
176  
           
The myAT&T page is displayed.  
Launching Navigation  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Navigation  
.
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to  
continue.  
2. Read the Navigation information page and tap Accept  
to continue or Don’t Accept to exit.  
3. Enter your Wireless # and Password using the onscreen  
3. Select one of the following options:  
• Speak Destination: allows you to speak your destination.  
• Type Destination: allows you to use the keypad to enter your  
destination.  
keypad, then tap Login  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Navigation  
Navigation is an internet-connected GPS navigation system  
with voice guidance. You can type or speak your destination.  
• Contacts: displays a list of all of your contacts that have  
addresses listed.  
Note: For voice-guided navigation, you need to install text-to-  
• Starred Places: allows you to keep a list of favorite  
destinations, locations, restaurants, etc. Just tap a starred item  
to get directions.  
speech support from the Android Market.  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
• Recent Destinations: allows you to access information on  
previous destinations you have used. This option only appears  
after you have entered one or more destinations.  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
Navigation Options  
The map displays with your location in the center.  
Press for the following options:  
• Exit Navigation: exits the Navigation application and returns  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
you to the Application Menu screen.  
Applications  
177  
     
• Route Info: displays your route on a map.  
• Set Destination: displays the Choose Destination screen  
where you can speak or type your destination.  
• Search: allows you to speak or type a destination, place, or  
service to search for.  
Screen Dimming: set this option to dim the screen between  
instructions in order to conserve battery power.  
Obtaining Driving Directions  
Your phone’s built-in GPS hardware allows you to get real-  
time driving directions to selected locations or  
establishments based on your current location.  
Using a Physical Address  
• Layers: are additional items that you can have displayed on  
your map. They include:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Navigation  
.
Traffic view: displays real-time traffic conditions so you can  
plan the fastest route.  
2. Tap either Speak Destination or Type Destination  
.
3. If typing in the address, enter the address, City, and  
State using the keypad. As you type, possible  
addresses will be displayed. Tap on one when you see  
the address you want.  
Satellite: allows you to see you the map as a satellite image.  
Parking: allows you to see registered parking areas.  
Gas Stations: allows you to see registered gas stations.  
ATMs & Banks: allows you to see registered ATMs and Banks.  
Restaurants: allows you to see registered restaurants.  
The route will be displayed.  
4. If speaking the address, the Voice guidance screen is  
displayed. For voice-guided navigation you need to  
install text-to-speech support from the Android Market.  
Tap Install to install the application or tap Skip to exit.  
• Directions List: displays the written directions on how to arrive  
at your destination.  
• Help: takes you to the Google Mobile Help web page.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays Terms and Conditions for  
Google mobile products, the Google Privacy Policy, and Google  
legal notices.  
• Settings: includes the following options:  
178  
Weather settings: allows you to choose location(s) and set the  
metric for temperature displays.  
Note: You will need to be signed on to your Google account  
before downloading applications from the Android  
News settings: allows you to choose topics, configure settings  
for fetching articles and images, and view the terms of service  
for news service.  
5. As you drive the route display will be updated and you  
Refresh settings: allows you to choose options for updating  
content.  
will receive voice-guided navigation directions.  
Application version: displays the application version number.  
News & Weather  
The News & Weather application allows you to view the news  
and weather in your area.  
4. To view the news, sweep the screen to the left to  
display Top Stories U.S. Sports, and Entertainment.  
,
,
1. From the Home screen, tap  
News & Weather  
NFS Shift  
Now is the time for all good  
men to come to the aid of their  
country The quick brown fox  
.
jumps over the lazy dog.  
.
NFS (Need for Speed) Shift is a high performance racing  
The Weather screen is displayed with current  
temperature, conditions, Humidity, and Wind speed.  
game. You can use many different tracks in international  
locations with day and night driving.  
To play, follow these steps:  
2. Tap the temperature to display a graph mapping the  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
NFS Shift  
.
days temperature and humidity.  
The game will download to your phone.  
3. While on the Weather screen, press  
to display the  
following options:  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to play the demo  
• Refresh: allows you to refresh the screen. Your location and the  
weather is updated if there have been any changes.  
game or buy the full version.  
• Settings: allows you to set weather, news, and refresh settings.  
Applications  
179  
         
3. Tap on a business that you want to see the details for.  
4. The business details such as address, phone, website,  
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews  
from around the web and from Google users.  
Photo Editor  
The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions  
for pictures that you take on your phone. Along with basic  
image tuning like brightness, contrast, and color it also  
provides a wide variety of effects used for editing the picture.  
Play Books  
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million  
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the  
eBookstore.  
Places  
Places is an application that uses Google Maps and your  
location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,  
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own  
locations.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Books  
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Books  
applications.  
The Places application allows you to find the best sources for  
business information across the web, including business  
listing details, reviews, photos, nearby public transit, and  
other related information. Business owners can provide  
additional details, like photos, hours of operation, and  
coupons.  
Play Movies  
With Google Play Movies, you can rent movies to watch on  
your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Places  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Movies  
.
2. Tap on one of the business categories to search for a  
particular business.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Movies  
applications.  
All of the business categories that are close to you will  
be displayed.  
180  
             
Play Music  
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Play Store  
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access  
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have  
added to your music file as well as any music you copied  
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have  
copied from your PC.  
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap  
Applications  
Play Store  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Movies  
.
2. Sign in to your Google account.  
2. Log on to your Google account. For more information,  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Music  
applications.  
3. The first time you sign in, the Android Market Terms of  
Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or  
Decline to exit.  
4. Tap Apps Games, or AT&T to download or purchase  
,
games or applications. You can also download updates  
to existing applications.  
Play Store  
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and  
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to  
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag  
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.  
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.  
Note: To use any downloaded market application that requires  
a USB connection between your phone and your PC, you  
should first set the USB utilities setting to Connect  
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.  
1. From the main Home screen, tap Play Store  
.
Applications  
181  
       
• Quickpoint: allows you to view existing Powerpoint documents  
from your SD card and your Recent Documents folder.  
Qik Lite  
Allows you to record and share live video from your device  
with your friends, family and your favorite social networks.  
• QuickPDF: allows you to view existing PDF documents from  
your SD card and your Recent Documents folder.  
4. Select an option and follow the on-screen instructions.  
Quickoffice  
The Quickoffice application allows you to create and save  
Microsoft Word and Excel documents. You can also view  
existing Powerpoint presentations and PDFs.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap the E-mail Address field, then use the keypad to  
enter your E-mail address. Tap Register Now  
– or –  
Search  
The Search application is the same on-screen Internet  
search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on your main  
Quickoffice  
.
.
Settings  
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for  
your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,  
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.  
Tap Register Later  
.
The Quickoffice screen is displayed.  
3. The following Quickoffice applications are available:  
• Quickword: allows you to create and save Word documents on  
your phone. you can also access Word documents from your  
SD card and your Recent Documents folder.  
Social Hub  
With Social Hub, you can now easily and intuitively satisfy all  
of your relevant communication needs from one integrated  
user experience. E-mails, instant messaging, social network  
contents, and calendar contents from all major service  
providers are available.  
• Quicksheet: allows you to create and save Excel spreadsheet  
documents.  
182  
               
To access Social Hub, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Talk  
Social Hub  
.
Google Talk is a free Windows and web-based application for  
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are  
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account.  
This allows you to search a chat log and store them in your  
The Social Hub Welcome page describes all of the  
available features.  
2. To setup your Social Hub account, tap Set up now  
.
3. Tap on the Social Hub account type that you would like  
to set up.  
Task  
4. Read the SNS disclaimer, tap the I accept all the terms  
above checkbox, then tap Agree to continue.  
With the Task application you can create a task list of things  
you need to do and check them off after the task is complete.  
5. Tap Next  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Task  
.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions for adding an  
account.  
2. Tap Create task to start a new task entry.  
3. Tap the Name field and enter a task name using the  
keypad.  
7. From the Social Hub main screen, tap the Feeds or  
Messages tabs to see information pertaining to your  
account.  
4. Tap the Due date field and enter a due date name using  
the keypad. If there is no date that the task is due, tap  
the No due date checkbox.  
8. To add another account, press  
account  
9. To refresh your status, press  
Accounts  
Add  
.
5. If desired, enter Task  
,
Priority  
,
Reminder, and Notes  
Status update  
.
then tap Save  
.
6. At the Task list screen, press  
to display the  
following options:  
Applications  
183  
     
• Create: allows you to create a new task.  
• Delete: allows you to delete one or all of your tasks.  
• Search: allows you to search your tasks for a particular word or  
words.  
• Active applications: displays all of the applications that are  
presently running on your phone. Tap Exit to end an application,  
or tap Exit all to end all running applications.  
• Downloaded: displays the size of your downloaded application  
programs.  
• List by: allows you to sort by Due date, Status, or Priority.  
• Sync task: allows you to sync your tasks to any of your  
accounts.  
• RAM: displays the Random Access Memory (RAM) and allows  
you to clear RAM.  
• Storage: displays a summary of your device’s storage (used  
and available).  
7. From the Task list screen, tap a task once you have  
completed it and a checkmark appears next to the  
task. The task name is also grayed out so that you can  
still read it.  
• Help: displays information on how to extend battery life.  
Video player  
The Video player application plays video files stored on your  
Task manager  
The Task manager application provides information about the  
processes and programs running on your phone, as well as  
the memory status. It can also be used to terminate  
processes and applications.  
Visual Voicemail  
AT&T Visual Voicemail provides an email-like inbox that lets  
you listen to voicemail messages in any order that you  
choose. You can also upgrade this service to transcribe your  
voicemail messages into text so that you can read or listen to  
To access the Task manager, follow these steps:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Task manager  
.
2. The Task Manager options are located at the top of the  
screen. The following options are available:  
184  
         
Voice command  
Voice recorder  
With the Voice command application you can use your voice  
to perform operations that you would normally have to do by  
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,  
playing music, etc.  
The Voice recorder allows you to record an audio file up to  
one minute long and then immediately share it using  
AllShare, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time  
will vary based on the available memory within the phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice command  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice recorder  
.
.
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to  
continue.  
2. To start recording, tap  
Record  
and speak into the  
microphone.  
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to  
continue.  
3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop  
Stop  
to stop and save the recording or Pause  
Pause  
to temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap  
to resume recording. Once the audio  
recording has stopped, the message is automatically  
4. Read the information on the How to Use Samsung voice  
Record  
screen, then tap Confirm  
.
5. Tap Finish  
.
saved. Tap  
saving.  
Cancel  
to cancel the recording without  
6. At the Voice command screen, tap on an icon for  
assistance in using Voice command or tap Tap & Speak  
to speak what you would like to do.  
4. Tap  
List  
to display a list of all your voice  
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
5. Press  
to display the following options:  
• Share: allows you to share your recording using Bluetooth,  
Email, Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
8. For more information, press  
Help.  
Applications  
185  
         
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap  
the recordings to delete and tap Done  
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to  
continue.  
.
• Rename: allows you to rename your recordings.  
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to  
continue.  
• Settings: the following settings are available:  
4. Read the information on the How to use Samsung voice  
Storage: allows you to choose where your recordings will be  
saved. Select between Phone or memory card.  
Default name: allows you to choose the name prefix for your  
recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your  
recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003,  
etc.  
screen, then tap Next  
5. Read the information on the Wake up Voice talk screen,  
then tap Next  
6. Read the information on the What can I say? screen,  
then tap Done  
.
.
.
Recording quality: allows you to set the recording quality to  
High or Normal.  
7. At the Voice talk screen, tap on an icon for assistance  
in using Voice command or tap Tap & Speak to speak  
what you would like to do.  
Limit for MMS: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for  
MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can  
be sent in a message.  
8. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
YouTube  
Voice talk  
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can  
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide  
variety of user-generated video content, including movie  
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content  
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other  
original videos.  
With the Voice talk application you can use your voice to  
perform operations that you would normally have to do by  
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,  
playing music, etc.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice talk  
.
186  
       
YP  
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended  
that you upgrade to an unlimited data plan to avoid  
additional data charges.  
The Yellowpages Mobile application provides quick and ready  
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your  
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local  
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your  
search in real-time.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YouTube  
.
2. Tap the search field to search for specific videos,  
scroll down to browse through the main page  
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional  
options.  
Note: The first time you use YP, you will need to download the  
updated application from the Market. When the Market  
page displays, tap Update or Install then follow the  
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or  
tap the title link.  
4. If you prefer high quality video, as the video starts to  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YP  
.
play, tap HQ  
5. Tap to go to your camcorder so you can take your  
own videos.  
.
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap  
Accept to continue.  
3. Read the introduction information and tap Continue  
.
Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view  
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access  
additional options, access the page via the Web browser  
and tap Sign in at the top right corner, enter your  
YouTube or Google username and password, and tap  
4. Your location is found using GPS. Tap OK to allow YP to  
use your current location.  
5. Enter a subject or business name, city, and state in the  
search field and tap Search  
.
6. Results will be displayed.  
Sign in  
.
Applications  
187  
     
7. Tap the globe icon to see the locations marked with  
pins on the map.  
8. Pinch the map screen inwards to zoom out or pinch it  
outwards to zoom in.  
9. Tap a pin to read information about the location.  
10. Tap  
to display additional options.  
188  
Section 11: Health and Safety Information  
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with  
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”  
are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this  
The majority of studies published have failed to show an  
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell  
phone and health problems.  
information before using your mobile device  
.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at  
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by  
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects  
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health  
effects.  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication  
includes the following information:  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not  
be confused with the effects from other types of  
electromagnetic energy.  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will  
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of  
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health  
problems.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found  
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.  
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away  
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the  
genetic material.  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.  
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds  
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio  
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some  
researchers have reported biological changes associated  
Health and Safety Information  
189  
         
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.  
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.  
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,  
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic  
radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to  
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and  
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal  
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for  
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and  
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.  
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little  
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection  
between RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In  
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies  
that have shown a connection have failed.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused  
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk  
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the  
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour  
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a  
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors  
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions  
being drawn from this data. Additional information about  
Interphone can be found at  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did  
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional  
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA  
continues to monitor developments in this field.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones  
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community  
has supported additional research to address gaps in  
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.  
190  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users  
(COSMOS)  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)  
Program of the National Cancer Institute  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health  
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there  
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio  
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study  
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in  
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the  
COSMOS study can be found at  
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk  
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell  
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.  
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence  
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about  
SEER can be found at  
.
.
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio  
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence  
(MOBI-KIDS)  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the  
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy  
from communication technologies including cell phones and  
brain cancer in young people. This is an international  
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European  
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be  
found at  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA  
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry  
to take a number of steps, including the following:  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF  
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to  
the user; and  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/  
view.php?ID=39.  
Health and Safety Information  
191  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting  
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on  
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to  
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect  
the public.  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the  
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in  
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in  
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance  
requirements when used against the head and against the  
body.  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for  
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in  
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head  
from RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
accessories which claim to shield the head from those  
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield  
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while  
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory  
attached to the phone.  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency  
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not  
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are  
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take  
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
your head and the cell phone.  
Hands-Free Kits  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets  
and various types of body-worn accessories such as  
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to  
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.  
192  
 
Studies have shown that these products generally do not  
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called  
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.  
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,  
leading to an increase in RF absorption.  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from  
various sources can be obtained from the following  
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):  
FCC RF Safety Program:  
Children and Cell Phones  
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users  
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and  
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure  
apply to children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
the head and the cell phone.  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones  
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United  
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.  
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no  
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors  
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone  
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based  
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Health Protection Agency:  
Health and Safety Information  
193  
 
US Food and Drug Administration:  
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC  
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6  
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety  
to give additional protection to the public and to account for  
any variations in measurements.  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is  
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure  
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its  
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.  
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified  
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while  
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)  
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed  
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the  
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF  
energy.  
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.  
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple  
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach  
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base  
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.  
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,  
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not  
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each  
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at  
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For  
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets  
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile  
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body  
194  
   
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory  
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a  
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.  
SAR information on this and other model phones can be  
accessed online on the FCC's website through http://  
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone  
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the  
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to  
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have  
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the  
instructions on the website and it should provide values for  
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional  
SAR information can also be obtained at  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with  
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an  
Equipment Authorization for this mobile phone with all  
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC  
RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values for this  
model phone as reported to the FCC are:  
WCDMA/GSM/EDGE and 700 MHz/AWS LTE  
The highest reported SAR values are:  
Head: 0.30 W/kg  
.
Body-worn accessory: 0.55 W/kg  
Product Specific: 0.85 W/kg  
Simultaneous Transmission: 0.87 W/kg  
FCC Part 15 Information to User  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned  
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.  
WLAN  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
The highest reported SAR values are:  
Head: 0.13 W/kg  
Body-worn accessory: < 0.10 W/kg  
Product Specific: < 0.10 W/kg  
Simultaneous Transmission: 0.87 W/kg  
Health and Safety Information  
195  
 
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
On the Road - Off the Phone  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe  
operation of his or her vehicle.  
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task  
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,  
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone  
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is  
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their  
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while  
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your  
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that  
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes  
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible  
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand  
and address distractions.  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices  
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always  
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or  
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use  
may be permitted in certain areas.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
196  
   
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the  
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.  
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.  
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web  
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these  
tips:  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video  
games while operating a vehicle.  
Use a hands-free device;  
Secure your phone within easy reach;  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
Place calls when you are not moving;  
Battery Use and Safety  
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are  
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;  
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;  
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or  
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper  
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the  
continued use of damaged batteries.  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise  
attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high  
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an  
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in  
an automobile:  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in  
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in  
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could  
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Health and Safety Information  
197  
   
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.  
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.  
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate  
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety  
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked  
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear  
to be working properly.  
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the  
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause  
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the  
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.  
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way  
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental  
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,  
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +  
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for  
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.  
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the  
object causing the short-circuiting.  
.
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the  
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery  
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair  
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in  
high temperatures.  
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and  
recharge your battery only with  
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone  
or the battery may explode when overheated.  
Samsung-approved chargers which are  
specifically designed for your phone.  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking  
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For  
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized  
service center.  
198  
WARNING!  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may  
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard  
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone  
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or  
chargers.  
.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not  
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.  
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.  
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers  
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with  
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling  
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.  
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or  
.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and  
accessories may not be available in your area.  
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung  
mobile device by working with respected take-back  
companies in every state in the country.  
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about  
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact  
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
Drop It Off  
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and  
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment  
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to  
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious  
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device  
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous  
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these  
locations may be found at:  
hazard  
.
.
Health and Safety Information  
199  
   
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted  
at these locations for no fee.  
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile  
devices and batteries  
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or  
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations  
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional  
information regarding specific locations may be found at:  
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance  
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these  
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help  
us protect the environment - recycle!  
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may  
.
explode.  
Mail It In  
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide  
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.  
Just go to  
A_recyle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to  
print out a free pre-paid postage label and then send your  
old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via U.S.  
Mail, for recycling.  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL  
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety  
instructions per UL guidelines:  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved  
recycler.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:  
Or call, (877) 278-0799.  
200  
   
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A  
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR  
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE  
POWER OUTLET.  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,  
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a  
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic  
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when  
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the  
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For  
more information, please refer to the “Standard  
Limited Warranty”.  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE  
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR  
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.  
Display / Touch-Screen  
Please note the following information when using your  
mobile device:  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
GPS & AGPS  
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is  
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use  
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause  
injury to you.  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning  
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS  
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are  
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the  
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio  
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance  
of location-based technology on your mobile device.  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted  
Global Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information  
from the cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS  
uses your wireless service provider's network and therefore  
Health and Safety Information  
201  
       
airtime, data charges, and/or additional charges may apply in  
accordance with your service plan. Contact your wireless  
service provider for details.  
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency  
responder instructs you.  
Navigation  
Your Location  
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data  
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or  
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over  
time. In some areas, complete information may not be  
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may  
Location-based information includes information that can be  
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile  
device. Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless  
network transmit location-based information. Additionally, if  
you use applications that require location-based information  
(e.g. driving directions), such applications transmit  
location-based information. The location-based information  
may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless  
service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other  
third-parties providing services.  
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs  
.
Emergency Calls  
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates  
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well  
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee  
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.  
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls  
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may  
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the  
emergency responders your approximate location.  
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless  
mobile device for essential communications (medical  
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or  
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of  
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to  
AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area  
.
Therefore:  
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of  
your ability; and  
202  
   
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be  
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal  
strength.  
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an  
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do  
so.  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile  
device networks or when certain network services and/or  
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service  
providers.  
Care and Maintenance  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The  
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty  
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many  
years:  
To make an emergency call:  
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
. The dialer is  
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
displayed.  
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location  
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).  
Emergency numbers vary by location.  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and  
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic  
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not  
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or  
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and  
could cause a fire or explosion.  
4. Tap the  
key.  
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you  
may first need to deactivate those features before you can  
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your  
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency  
call, remember to give all the necessary information as  
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device  
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so  
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the  
mobile device.  
Health and Safety Information  
203  
   
Extreme heat or cold  
Responsible Listening  
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /  
113°F.  
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
Microwaves  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as  
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged  
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most  
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific  
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as  
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume  
settings for long durations may lead to permanent  
noise-induced hearing loss.  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Dust and dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft  
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water  
solution.  
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,  
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).  
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in  
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),  
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential  
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound  
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the  
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones  
Shock or vibration  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
Paint  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the  
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent  
proper operation.  
204  
   
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting  
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of  
sound, settings, and equipment.  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less  
time is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
You should follow some common sense recommendations  
when using any portable audio device:  
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into  
an audio source.  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,  
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your  
hearing.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,  
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music  
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Internet:  
Health and Safety Information  
205  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
Internet:  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/  
default.html  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Operating Environment  
Internet:  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any  
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or  
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory  
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety  
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.  
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic  
Devices  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic  
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from  
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to  
discuss alternatives.  
National Institute for Occupational Safety  
and Health (NIOSH)  
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH  
(1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
206  
   
Implantable Medical Devices  
Other Medical Devices  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an  
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or  
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential  
interference with the device.  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able  
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your  
mobile device off in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment  
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
Persons who have such devices:  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches  
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is  
turned ON;  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with  
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle  
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You  
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that  
has been added to your vehicle.  
Posted Facilities  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted  
notices require you to do so.  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any  
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;  
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of  
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about  
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical  
device, consult your health care provider.  
Potentially Explosive Environments  
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a  
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and  
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion  
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-  
.
Health and Safety Information  
207  
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are  
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling  
point (service station).  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices  
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has  
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices  
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive  
hearing devices.  
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the  
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and  
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting  
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive  
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They  
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage  
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals  
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any  
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off  
your vehicle engine.  
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices  
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile  
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining  
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others  
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the  
amount of interference they generate.  
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating  
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device  
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their  
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.  
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or  
a label located on the box.  
When your Device is Wet  
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is  
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if  
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,  
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it  
to a service center.  
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending  
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing  
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not  
208  
   
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out  
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to  
evaluate it for your personal needs.  
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless  
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two  
values equals M5.  
M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet  
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference  
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.  
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to  
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not  
operate in telecoil mode.  
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user  
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the  
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would  
indicate excellent performance.  
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be  
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.  
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC  
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to  
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4  
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to  
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in  
telecoil mode.  
M3  
+
M2  
=
5
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid  
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you  
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device  
is relatively immune to interference noise.  
Under the current industry standard, American National  
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and  
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to  
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a  
T3  
+
T2  
=
5
Health and Safety Information  
209  
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in  
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19  
standard.  
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out  
of the reach of small children.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
HAC for Newer Technologies  
FCC Notice  
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing  
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.  
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies  
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with  
hearing aids.  
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used  
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can  
require you to stop using the mobile device if such  
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with  
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy  
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection  
Association.  
It is important to try the different features of this phone  
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid  
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering  
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of  
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you  
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult  
your service provider or phone retailer.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not  
expressly approved in this document could void your  
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to  
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,  
antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized  
accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device  
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the  
mobile device.  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play  
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,  
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your  
mobile device bill.  
210  
       
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex  
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,  
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.  
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed  
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air  
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is  
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could  
result.  
Other Important Safety Information  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or  
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service  
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to  
the device.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use  
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be  
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate  
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on  
an aircraft.  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in  
your vehicle are securely mounted.  
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension  
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or  
both.  
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can  
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical  
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the  
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or  
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static  
electricity before inserting the headset.  
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do  
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.  
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing  
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended  
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device  
immediately.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive  
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its  
parts, or accessories.  
Health and Safety Information  
211  
   
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively  
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a  
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may  
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,  
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended  
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,  
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort  
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.  
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or  
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]  
212  
Section 12: Warranty Information  
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage  
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal  
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,  
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,  
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents  
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;  
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use  
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;  
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the  
Standard Limited Warranty  
What is covered and for how long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC  
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and  
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material  
and workmanship under normal use and service for the  
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first  
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following  
specified period of time after that date:  
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,  
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;  
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or  
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or  
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;  
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as  
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,  
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,  
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;  
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception  
Phone  
1 Year  
Batteries  
1 Year  
Case/Pouch/Holster  
90 Days  
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year  
What is not covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the  
Product.  
Warranty Information  
213  
       
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems  
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased  
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers  
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated  
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does  
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a  
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for  
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are  
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has  
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for  
which it is specified.  
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original  
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All  
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and  
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to  
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or  
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must  
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in  
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the  
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the  
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product  
and the seller’s name and address.  
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product  
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited  
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new  
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may  
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new  
Product.  
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please  
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor  
charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of  
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for  
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be  
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.  
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be  
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/  
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the  
214  
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?  
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR  
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH  
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,  
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS  
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER  
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT.  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF  
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.  
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO  
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF  
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF  
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,  
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR  
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT  
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY  
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS  
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be  
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with  
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,  
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend  
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or  
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,  
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited  
Warranty.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO  
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE  
Warranty Information  
215  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are  
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you  
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness  
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant  
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs  
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad  
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no  
more than half of the total administrative, facility and  
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and  
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.  
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with  
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or  
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,  
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class  
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single  
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,  
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall  
be conducted according to the American Arbitration  
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to  
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered  
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State  
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited  
Warranty.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any  
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or  
performance.  
216  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by  
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days  
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the  
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to  
Severability  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall  
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited  
Warranty.  
[email protected], with the subject line: “Arbitration  
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name  
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;  
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;  
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found  
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product  
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the  
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting  
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the  
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will  
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using  
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed  
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to  
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of  
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File  
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and  
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the  
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.  
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of  
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in  
order to provide this service at no charge. If the  
warranty has expired on the device, charges may  
apply.  
Warranty Information  
217  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
BY CLICKING THE “I ACCEPT” BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS  
OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE “I ACCEPT”, AND STILL  
INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE  
THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS  
OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS  
EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE “DECLINE” BUTTON, AND  
DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All  
rights reserved.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following  
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions  
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run  
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other  
permanent storage media of one computer and use the  
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,  
and you may not make the Software available over a network  
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same  
time. You may make one copy of the Software in  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior  
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to  
change without notice. [111611]  
End User License Agreement for  
Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License  
Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between you  
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. for software owned by Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated companies and its third  
party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA,  
which includes computer software and may include  
associated media, printed materials, “online” or electronic  
documentation (“Software”).  
machine-readable form for backup purposes only; provided  
that the backup copy must include all copyright or other  
proprietary notices contained on the original.  
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung  
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.  
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual  
218  
 
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the  
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the  
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.  
the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless  
we provide other terms along with such upgrade. To use  
Software identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed  
for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the  
upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the  
Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software  
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly  
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),  
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create  
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,  
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting  
services with the Software.  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or  
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party  
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device  
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer  
must include all of the Software (including all component  
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this  
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.  
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a  
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the  
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and  
its affiliates may collect and use technical information  
gathered as part of the product support services related to  
the Software provided to you, if any, related to the Software.  
Samsung may use this information solely to improve its  
products or to provide customized services or technologies to  
you and will not disclose this information in a form that  
personally identifies you.  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the  
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.  
You agree to comply with all applicable international and  
national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.  
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end  
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other  
governments.  
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements  
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that  
Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after  
Warranty Information  
219  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the  
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this  
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all  
copies, full or partial, of the Software.  
Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement,  
sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the  
third-party or its products and services. Purchaser agrees  
that SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or  
indirectly, for any damage or loss caused or alleged to  
caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on any  
such third-party content, products, or services available on  
or through any such application. Purchaser acknowledges  
and agrees that your use of any third-party application is  
governed by such third-party application provider’s Terms of  
Use, License Agreement, Privacy Policy, or other such  
agreement and that any information or personal data you  
provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such third-  
party application provider, will be subject to such third-party  
application provider’s privacy policy, if such a policy exists.  
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY  
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES  
OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.  
9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party  
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this  
mobile device. SAMSUNG makes no representations  
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since SAMSUNG  
has no control over such applications, Purchaser  
acknowledges and agrees that SAMSUNG is not responsible  
for the availability of such applications and is not responsible  
or liable for any content, advertising, products, services, or  
other materials on or available from such applications.  
Purchaser expressly acknowledges and agrees that use of  
third-party applications is at Purchaser’s sole risk and that  
the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance,  
accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to Purchaser to  
take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser selects  
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,  
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this  
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of  
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to  
10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party  
Applications. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY  
REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE,  
TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR  
RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR  
OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY  
220  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT  
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT,  
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER  
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT  
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS  
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR  
OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION IS DONE AT PURCHASER’S OWN DISCRETION  
AND RISK AND PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGE TO YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA  
THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY  
DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER  
PURCHASER’S PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY  
ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO  
WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE  
DEVICE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ON AN “AS AVAILABLE”  
BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM  
SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST  
EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW,  
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED,  
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY  
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,  
CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET  
PURCHASER’S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF  
THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED  
OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES  
THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR,  
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED  
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR  
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR  
INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY  
PURCHASER FROM SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER  
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY.  
11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR  
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR  
FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES  
Warranty Information  
221  
CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS, OMISSIONS,  
12. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The  
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as  
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"  
and "commercial software documentation" with only those  
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the  
terms and conditions herein. All Software and Products  
provided to the United States Government pursuant to  
solicitations issued on or after December 1, 1995 is provided  
with the commercial rights and restrictions described  
elsewhere herein. All Software and Products provided to the  
United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued  
prior to December 1, 1995 are provided with RESTRICTED  
RIGHTS as provided for in FAR, 48 CFR 52.227-14 (JUNE  
1987) or DFAR, 48 CFR 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), as  
applicable.  
INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN OPERATION OR  
TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO CONNECT,  
NETWORK CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,  
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO  
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION  
OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOT  
WITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG’S TOTAL  
LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES,  
CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE  
BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT  
OF PURCHASER’S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON  
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS  
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID  
SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION  
THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE  
FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS  
(INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE  
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF  
ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This  
EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on  
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application  
of which is expressly excluded. If a dispute, controversy or  
difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved  
by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the  
222  
Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board.  
The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the  
parties.  
Social Hub End User License Agreement which specifically  
governs your use of the software which forms part of, or enables  
you to access, the Service; and  
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the  
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the  
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral  
or written communications, proposals and representations  
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter  
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to  
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions  
shall continue in full force and effect.  
Social Hub Privacy Policy which governs our collection and use of  
personal information in connection with your access to and use of  
the Service.  
By using the Service, you agree to be bound by the above  
documents. Please read through those documents to make  
sure you understand the basis on which Samsung is  
providing the Service to you.  
You will be able to access additional features available at  
Social Hub  
.
Legal Terms and Privacy  
Social Hub Terms and Conditions  
Acceptance of the Terms  
Samsung's Social Hub and (if applicable) the website where  
you accessed this Disclaimer (collectively, the "Service"), is  
being made available to you by Samsung Electronics Co.,  
Ltd., and its affiliates and suppliers (collectively "Samsung")  
subject to the following enclosed documents:  
These Social Hub Terms and Conditions together with the  
Social Hub Privacy Policy and Social Hub End User Licence  
Agreement (collectively "Terms") govern your use of Social  
Hub, which comprises all content and services accessible  
through Social Hub (including third party content and  
services), and (if applicable) the website where you  
accessed these Terms (collectively the "Service"). The Terms  
constitute an agreement between you and Samsung  
Social Hub Terms and Conditions which governs your use of the  
Service generally;  
Warranty Information  
223  
   
Electronics Co., Ltd., and its affiliates (collectively  
"Samsung") with respect to the Service. By using the  
Service, you agree to be legally bound to the Terms.  
Terms and have your parent or legal guardian accept the  
Terms on your behalf in order for you to use the Service. The  
person accepting the Terms on your behalf must be legally  
competent.  
You are not allowed to use the Service if you do not agree to  
the Terms. To the extent permitted by applicable law,  
Samsung reserves the right to modify, update, supplement,  
revise or otherwise change the Terms, and to impose new or  
additional rules, policies, terms or conditions in relation to  
the Service, from time to time with or without notice to you  
("Amendments").  
Your Information  
When required to provide information in connection with your  
use of the Service, you agree to provide truthful and  
complete information. Providing misleading information  
about your identity is forbidden. When you first use the  
Service, you may be required to create a username and a  
password.  
Samsung may provide you with notice of the Amendments by  
sending an email message to the email address listed in your  
account information (if any), or by posting the notice on the  
Social Hub website.  
You (and your parent or legal guardian, if you are a minor) are  
personally responsible for any use of the Service with your  
username and password.  
Such Amendments will be effective immediately and  
incorporated into the Terms upon sending or posting of such  
notice. You are responsible for regularly reviewing the Terms.  
Your continued use of the Service will be deemed to  
You agree to take due care in protecting your username and  
password against misuse by others and promptly notify  
Samsung about any misuse.  
Termination of Service  
constitute your acceptance of any and all such Amendments.  
Samsung may terminate or restrict your access to certain  
parts of the Service if there is an indication that you have  
breached the Terms or at any time in its sole discretion.  
Eligibility  
To use the Service, you must be at least sixteen (16) years of  
age. If you are at least sixteen (16 ) years of age but are a  
minor for legal purposes where you live, you must review the  
224  
Not submit unlawful, offensive, abusive, pornographic, harassing,  
libelous or other inappropriate Material;  
Your Material  
Except as set forth in the Social Hub Privacy Policy, Samsung  
shall not be responsible for any removal of the information or  
content you have submitted in the course of using the  
Service ("Material") when your access to the Service is  
terminated. Your submission of Material in the course of  
using the Service does not transfer ownership rights in the  
Material to Samsung. After the Material is removed from the  
Service by either you or Samsung, some traces of the  
Material may remain and copies of the Material may still  
reside within the servers used in providing the Service.  
However, Samsung does not claim ownership in your  
Material.  
Respect the privacy of others;  
Obtain any consents, permission or licenses that may be required  
for you to have the legal right to submit any Material; and  
Not distribute or post spam, unreasonably large files, chain  
letters, pyramid schemes, viruses or any other technologies that  
may harm the Service, or the interest or property of the Service  
users.  
Unauthorized use of the Service (including any use in  
contravention of the Terms) is prohibited and may result in  
criminal prosecution and/or civil liability.  
You represent and warrant that you have obtained any  
consents, permission or licenses that may be required for  
you to have the legal right to submit any Material. Samsung  
reserves the right to terminate your access to the Service if  
Samsung determines, at its sole discretion, that you have  
repeatedly submitted infringing Materials to the Service.  
Restrictions  
You and any third party directed by You must not display,  
copy, store, modify, sell, publish or redistribute the Service  
(whether all or any portion of it), and such displaying,  
copying, storing, modification, sale, publishing and  
redistribution shall be prohibited unless you have obtained all  
necessary rights and permissions from Samsung and the  
owners and right holders of such the Service or relevant part.  
Using the Service  
You agree to:  
Use the Service only for your private, non-commercial purposes;  
Comply with applicable laws, the Terms and good manners;  
Warranty Information  
225  
You must not use the Service for any purposes other than  
those permitted under the Terms. Without limiting this  
restriction, you must not use the service for any illegal  
purposes, to make unsolicited offers or advertisements, to  
impersonate or falsely claim affiliation with any person or  
entity, to misrepresent, harass, defraud or defame others, to  
post obscene or unreasonably offensive material, to  
negatively present the Service, nor for any commercial  
purposes.  
Actions Required by Law  
Samsung may need to comply with lawful interception and/or  
data retention requirements imposed by your country of  
residence or any other country in which you use the Service.  
Samsung may restrict access to any part of the Service or  
terminate your access to the Service, at any time in its sole  
discretion if required by law or by the relevant authorities or  
regulatory agencies to do so.  
Third Party Sites and Content  
Except as expressly permitted by the Terms, and except to  
the extent that applicable laws prevent Samsung from  
restraining you from doing so, you are not allowed to  
disassemble, reverse engineer, tamper with the Service,  
transmit malicious code or collect information of other users  
through the Service.  
The Service may allow access to sites on the Internet that  
are owned or operated by third parties. Access to such sites  
does not imply that Samsung endorses the site or the  
conduct, products or services on the site. Upon accessing  
any such site, you must review and agree to the rules of use  
of the relevant site before using the site.  
You may not take any action to interrupt the functionality of  
or tamper with the Service or any content or service  
contained in or provided through the Service, or any servers  
used in providing the Service, or to unreasonably affect  
others' enjoyment of the Service in any way.  
You acknowledge and agree that Samsung has no control  
over the content, products or services of third-party sites and  
does not assume any responsibility for or in respect of such  
content, products or services. Third party content and  
services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and  
Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any  
content or service will remain available for any period of  
226  
time. Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or  
liability for any interruption or suspension of any third party  
content or service.  
Samsung does not represent or warrant that the Service, or  
any part thereof, is appropriate or available for use in any  
particular jurisdiction. If you choose to access the Service,  
you do so on you own initiative and at you own risk, and you  
are responsible for complying with all US federal, state and  
local laws, rules and regulations.  
In addition, Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for  
customer service related to third party sites. Any question or  
request for service relating to third party sites should be  
made directly to the relevant site operator.  
Dealings with Others  
You may interact with other users on or through the Service.  
You agree that any such interactions do not involve Samsung  
and are solely between you and the other user(s).  
Subscription Information  
Use of the Service may involve transmission of data through  
your service provider's network. Your network service  
provider may charge you for such data transmission.  
Samsung assumes no responsibility for the payment of any  
such charges.  
Intellectual Property  
The Service and related software are protected under  
international copyright laws and you are hereby notified that  
copyrights are claimed by Samsung.  
Availability  
The Service may be network dependent - contact your  
network service provider for more information. Samsung  
reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to change, improve  
and correct the Service. The Service may not be available  
during maintenance breaks and other times. Samsung may  
also decide to discontinue the Service or any part thereof in  
its sole discretion. In such case you will be provided with  
prior notification.  
Subject to the Terms, Samsung retains all right, title and  
interest in the Service and in all Samsung's products,  
software and other properties provided to you or used by you  
through the Service.  
Personal Data  
The Social Hub Privacy Policy and the following additional  
provisions govern the use of your personal information. When  
you access the Service, Samsung may ask for or otherwise  
Warranty Information  
227  
collect certain personal information such as your email  
address along with your user name and password and, in  
certain cases, your mobile phone number so that we can  
communicate with you, for example to send notifications of  
incoming messages. When you use the Service, certain  
technical information such as the type and serial number of  
your mobile device, Internet protocol address, your mobile  
network and country codes, timezone, technical details of  
your client as well as your transactions with Samsung, for  
example your acceptance of the Terms, will be automatically  
collected by Samsung.  
Samsung's servers, Samsung will not process the content or  
headers of your messages for any purpose other than as  
necessary to deliver and manage your messages, unless  
otherwise required by law.  
In connection with certain services accessible via the  
Service, Samsung may cooperate with your operator and  
other third parties. Samsung may receive from such third  
parties certain device specific non-personal information,  
such as device serial number of the devices sold by the  
operator with preinstalled software for the Service. Such  
information may be used for aanalyzing the activation of the  
Service.  
The purposes for which Samsung may use such data are  
explained in the Social Hub Privacy Policy. Samsung may also  
participate with your selected service providers in  
maintaining your contact lists.  
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY  
THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED ON "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE"  
BASIS. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW  
AND SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, SAMSUNG DOES NOT  
WARRANT THAT THE SERVICE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR  
ERROR OR VIRUS-FREE.  
The third party services and content you access through the  
Service and the telecommunications carriers and the  
network through which you access the Service are provided  
and hosted by your selected third party content and service  
providers who typically has a privacy policy of its own. We  
recommend you familiarize yourself with your service  
provider's privacy policy. Samsung is not responsible for the  
privacy or any other practices of such service providers.  
Although your messages will be transmitted through  
TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY THE LAW AND  
SUBJECT TO THE TERMS, NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,  
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OR  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS  
228  
 
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, IS MADE IN RELATION TO THE  
AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OF THE SERVICE,  
INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION OR CONTENT PROVIDED  
THROUGH THE SERVICE. YOU EXPRESSLY AGREE AND  
ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR  
SOLE RISK AND THAT YOU MAY BE EXPOSED TO CONTENT  
FROM VARIOUS SOURCES.  
IF THERE IS A CLAIM THAT WE HAVE BREACHED ANY OF THE  
PROVISIONS IN THE TERMS, THIS DOES NOT AFFECT OR  
INVALIDATE THE OTHER PROVISIONS.  
CERTAIN STATUTORY PROVISIONS UNDER APPLICABLE LAW  
MAY IMPLY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR IMPOSE  
OBLIGATIONS UPON SAMSUNG WHICH CANNOT BE  
EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED OR CANNOT BE  
EXCLUDED, RESTRICTED OR MODIFIED EXCEPT TO A  
LIMITED EXTENT. THE TERMS MUST BE READ SUBJECT TO  
THESE STATUTORY PROVISIONS. IF THESE STATUTORY  
PROVISIONS APPLY, TO THE EXTENT TO WHICH SAMSUNG IS  
ABLE TO DO SO, SAMSUNG LIMITS ITS LIABILITY UNDER  
THOSE PROVISIONS TO, AT ITS OPTION, IN THE CASE OF  
SERVICES (A) THE SUPPLYING OF THE SERVICES AGAIN; OR  
(B) THE PAYMENT OF THE COST OF HAVING THE SERVICES  
SUPPLIED AGAIN AND, IN THE CASE OF GOODS, (A) THE  
REPLACEMENT OF THE GOODS OR THE SUPPLY OF  
EQUIVALENT GOODS; (B) THE REPAIR OF THE GOODS; (C) THE  
PAYMENT OF THE COST OF REPLACING THE GOODS OR OF  
ACQUIRING EQUIVALENT GOODS; OR (D) THE PAYMENT OF  
THE COST OF HAVING THE GOODS REPAIRED.  
SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY  
THIRD PARTY CONTENT OR SERVICE THAT MAY BE  
ACCESSED THROUGH THE SERVICE, NOR SHALL SAMSUNG  
BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR MALICIOUS CODE CONTAINED  
ON OR DISTRIBUTED THROUGH BY THIRD PARTIES.  
YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES,  
LOSSES, COSTS, OR HARM ARISING FROM YOUR USE OF OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE SERVICE. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED  
BY LAW, EXCEPT FOR LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL  
INJURY CAUSED BY GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR INTENTIONAL  
MISCONDUCT, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITIES WITH  
RESPECT TO YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE (INCLUDING DIRECT,  
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES).  
Warranty Information  
229  
Indemnification  
Miscellaneous  
You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Samsung  
from and against any and all third party claims and all  
liabilities, assessments, losses, costs or damages resulting  
from or arising out of i) your breach of the Terms, ii) your  
infringement or violation of any intellectual property, other  
rights or privacy of a third party, iii) misuse of the Service by  
a third party where such misuse was made possible due to  
your failure to take reasonable measures to protect your  
username and password against misuse.  
The Terms (including all documents comprising the Terms)  
constitute the entire agreement between you and Samsung,  
and supersedes any prior agreement between you and  
Samsung, with respect to your use of the Service. Your use of  
any third-party content or service accessed via the Service  
will be governed by the terms and conditions furnished with,  
and applicable to that content or service. If any provision of  
the Terms is held invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that  
portion of the Terms shall be construed in a manner  
consistent with applicable law to reflect, as nearly as  
possible, the original intentions of the parties, and the  
remaining portion of the Terms shall remain in full force and  
effect. Samsung's failure to enforce any right or provision of  
the Terms will not constitute a waiver of such provision, or  
any other provision of the Terms.  
Choice of Law  
Except where prohibited by applicable law or provided  
otherwise herein, the Terms shall be governed by the laws of  
the State of New York without regard to its conflict of law  
provisions.  
You and Samsung agree to submit to the non-exclusive  
jurisdiction of the competent courts in the State of New York  
to resolve any legal matters arising from the Terms.  
Notwithstanding this, you agree that Samsung shall still be  
allowed to apply for injunctive remedies (or equivalent type  
of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.  
Samsung will not be liable or responsible for any failure to  
fulfill any of its obligations under the Terms which failure is  
due to any cause or condition beyond the reasonable control  
of Samsung. If there is any conflict between these Social Hub  
Terms and Conditions and the Social Hub Privacy Policy, the  
provisions of these Social Hub Terms and Conditions shall  
230  
prevail. The provisions of the Terms that are intended to or by  
their nature should survive termination of your use of the  
Service shall remain valid after any such termination.  
as your acceptance of the Privacy Policy and of our  
collection, use, disclosure, management and storage of your  
personal information as described below. We may, from time  
to time, transfer or merge any personal information collected  
off-line to our online databases or store off-line information  
in an electronic format. We may also combine personal  
information we collect online with information available from  
other sources, including information received from our  
affiliates, marketing companies, or advertisers. This Privacy  
Policy covers all such personal information and will remain in  
full force and effect as long as you are a user of the Service,  
even if your use of or participation in any particular service,  
feature, function or promotional activity terminates, expires,  
ceases, is suspended or deactivated for any reason.  
Social Hub Privacy Policy  
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") is committed to  
protecting the online privacy of visitors, users and customers  
to our Social Hub service. This privacy policy ( "Privacy  
Policy") forms part of the Terms which govern your use of  
Social Hub(excluding any third party content and services),  
and (if applicable) the website where you accessed this  
Privacy Policy, (collectively, the "Service"). The purpose of  
the Privacy Policy is to inform you about the types of  
information we gather about you when you access or use the  
Service, how we may use that information, and if and how  
we disclose it to third parties.  
INFORMATION THAT WE COLLECT  
Personal Information  
All users of the Service are required to provide true, current,  
complete and accurate personal information when prompted  
and we will reject and delete any entry that we believe in  
good faith to be incorrect, false, falsified, or fraudulent, or  
inconsistent with or in violation of the Privacy Policy.  
We may request that you supply us with "personal"  
information, such as your name, e-mail address, mailing  
address, home or work telephone number in the course of  
you accessing or using the Service, such as via registration  
forms, surveys, and polls. In each such case, you will know  
what categories of information we collect because you will  
actively provide the information to us. You may not be able to  
We will provide you with an opportunity to give your consent  
in relation to your use of the Service. Separate from such  
consent, your access or use of the Service will be construed  
Warranty Information  
231  
   
fully utilize all of the features or components of the Service if  
you choose not to provide certain information. If you do  
choose to give us personal information through the Service,  
we will collect and retain that information.  
use aggregated non-personal information about our users to  
understand the demographics of users of the Service, such  
as the percentage of male and female users, the geographic  
distribution of our users, the age ranges of our users, a  
combination of these and/or other demographics. We may  
also use the personal or non-personal information we collect  
to analyze how Service is being used, and to improve the  
content of the Service, and for marketing and promotional  
efforts.  
Non-Personal Information  
When you use the Service, we may also collect  
"non-personal" information. We consider "non-personal  
information" to be information that, by itself, cannot be used  
to identify or contact you personally, such as demographic  
information (your age, gender, income, education,  
E-mail Communications  
profession, zip code, etc.). Non-personal information may  
also include technical information, such as your IP address  
and other anonymous data involving your use of the Service.  
If you send us an e-mail with questions or comments, we  
may use your personal information to respond to your  
questions or comments, and we may save your questions or  
comments for future reference. Aside from our reply to such  
an e-mail, it is not our standard practice to send you e-mail  
unless you request a particular service that involves e-mail  
communications. However, you consent to us contacting you  
by e-mail, and sending you information about products and  
services which we believe may be of interest to you. You may  
have the opportunity to subscribe to an electronic newsletter  
in which case information about the Service or our  
Non-personal information may also include information that  
you provide us through your use of the Service, such as the  
terms you enter into the search functions of Social Hub, mail  
inbox and instant messenger. We reserve the right to use or  
disclose non-personal information in any way we see fit.  
USE OF INFORMATION WE COLLECT  
Our Services  
We use your personal information to provide you with any  
services that you may request or require, to communicate  
with you and to allow you to participate in online surveys. We  
advertisers will be sent to your e-mail address. We will  
provide you with the option to change your preferences and  
opt-out of receiving those communications. You may request  
232  
 
at any time that we not e-mail you in future by clicking the  
"unsubscribe" link which is included at the bottom of any  
e-mail that you receive from us. If you unsubscribe, we will  
make reasonable efforts to discontinue e-mail  
We require these companies to use your personal  
information only to provide the particular product or service  
and do not authorize them to use your personal information  
for any other reason. We sometimes offer promotions in  
conjunction with a third party sponsor.  
communications to you as soon as practicable.  
If you choose to participate in those promotions, we may  
share your information with the sponsor if they need it to  
send you a product or other special promotion they offer.  
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION TO  
THIRD PARTIES  
Aggregate Information  
Third Party Advertisers  
Except as specifically set forth in this Privacy Policy, we do  
not share your personal information with any third party  
without your permission. We may disclose aggregate  
information, such as demographic information, and our  
statistical analyses to third parties, including advertisers or  
other business partners. This aggregate information does not  
include your personal information.  
We may use third-party advertising companies to deliver  
specific advertisements to you. These companies may collect  
non-personal information about your visits to Social Hub in  
order to provide advertisements about products and services  
that may be of interest to you.  
These companies may also aggregate your non-personal  
information for use in targeted advertising, marketing  
research, and other similar purposes. These companies may  
place their own cookies on your computer. If you want to  
prevent a third-party advertiser from collecting and using this  
information, you may visit each third party advertiser's  
website directly and opt-out.  
Service Providers  
We sometimes engage unaffiliated businesses to assist us in  
providing you certain services. For example, we may use  
third parties to provide advertising, marketing and  
promotional assistance, provide e-mail services, or facilitate  
our online services. In those instances, we may need to  
share your personal information with them.  
Warranty Information  
233  
 
always some risk in transmitting information electronically.  
The personal information we collect is stored within  
databases that we control.  
Other Disclosures  
We may disclose personal information when we are required  
or requested to do so by law, court order or other  
government or law enforcement authority or regulatory  
agency; to enforce or apply our rights and agreements; or  
when we believe in good faith that disclosing this information  
is necessary or advisable, including, for example, to protect  
the rights, property, or safety of the Service and Samsung,  
our users, or others.  
As we deem appropriate, we use security measures  
consistent with industry standards, such as firewalls and  
encryption technology, to protect your information. However,  
we cannot guarantee the security of our databases, nor can  
we guarantee that information you supply won't be  
intercepted while being transmitted to us over the Internet.  
CHAT ROOMS AND OTHER PUBLIC  
AREAS  
CHILDREN  
The Service is not designed for use by children without their  
parent's supervision. We ask that anyone under the age of  
sixteen (16) not submit any personal information through the  
Service. We do not knowingly collect any personal  
information from children under the age of eighteen, and  
therefore we do not knowingly distribute such information to  
third parties.  
Our third party service and content providers may offer chat,  
user reviews, bulletin boards, or other public functions and  
any posting by you is considered public information available  
to other users. Any posting is governed in accordance with  
the third party service and content providers' terms and  
conditions. You should take care not to use personal  
information in your screen name or other information that  
might be publicly available to other users.  
SECURITY OF THE INFORMATION WE  
COLLECT  
The security of your personal information is important to us.  
We maintain physical, electronic, and procedural safeguards  
to secure your personal information. However, there is  
Archived Information  
We maintain archives of web logs, database, and other  
systems and information in relation to the Service. Please  
note that it is possible some of this information may remain  
234  
     
archived after we delete the information from its active  
database. We maintain archives for disaster recovery, legal  
and other non-marketing purposes.  
ACCURACYOFTHEINFORMATIONWE  
COLLECT  
Any questions you may have regarding this Privacy Policy,  
the accuracy of your personal information or the use of your  
personal information, or any requests that we correct,  
update, or remove your information in our databases, should  
be directed via e-mail to [email protected], or via  
regular mail to:  
How can I update my profile?  
You can help us maintain the accuracy of your profile by  
notifying us when you change zip/postal code, country of  
residence, age range, or e-mail address. If at any time you  
wish to update your information or stop receiving  
communication from us, sign in to the Service and then  
select 'update your profile' to change your preferences.  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive, Richardson, TX 75082  
Attn: Customer Support Department  
CONTESTS AND SWEEPSTAKES  
Registration may be required to enter promotions such as  
contests and sweepstakes on Social Hub. These registration  
or entry processes may require your submission of personal  
information such as your first and last name, street address,  
city, state and zip code, e-mail address, telephone number  
and date of birth. The entry page and/or rules for the  
promotion will provide the specific requirements for the  
promotion. You may also have the opportunity to opt-in to  
special offers from our advertisers in connection with these  
promotions.  
After receiving a request to change your information, we will  
make reasonable efforts to ensure that all of your personal  
information stored in databases we actively use to operate  
the Service will be updated, corrected, changed or deleted,  
as appropriate, as soon as reasonably practicable. However,  
we reserve the right to retain in our archival files any  
information we remove from or change in our active  
databases. We may retain such information to resolve  
disputes, troubleshoot problems and enforce our Terms.  
Warranty Information  
235  
   
In addition, it is not technologically possible to remove each  
and every record of the information you have provided to us.  
A copy of your personal information may exist in a  
non-erasable form that will be difficult or impossible for us to  
locate.  
2. LICENSE  
2.1 Licensor grants you for the term of this License a  
limited, personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license to  
use the Software in object code executable only form on a  
single device for non-commercial uses.  
CHANGES TO PRIVACY POLICY  
2.2 All rights not expressly granted to you under this License  
are reserved to Licensor, and you agree not to take or permit  
any action with respect to the Software that is not expressly  
authorised under this License. For the avoidance of doubt,  
you have no right to use, incorporate into other products,  
copy, modify, translate or transfer to any third party the  
Software or any modification, adaptation or copy of the  
Software or any part thereof, nor to decompile, reverse  
engineer, or disassemble the binary code of the Software,  
either in whole or in part, except as expressly provided in this  
License.  
This Privacy Policy is effective as of May 29, 2010 and  
complies with Samsung's Corporate Privacy Policy. We  
reserve the right to change this Privacy Policy at any time,  
and will post any such changes to this Privacy Policy on the  
Social Hub website. Please refer back to the Social Hub  
website on a regular basis to obtain the most up to date  
Privacy Policy.  
Social Hub End User License  
Agreement  
1. SOCIAL HUB  
This end user license ("License") allows you to use Social  
Hub ("Software") made available on your mobile device. This  
License is a legally binding agreement between you and  
Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd. the ("Licensor").  
2.3 The Software is licensed to you only. You may not rent,  
lease, sub-license, sell, assign, pledge, transfer or otherwise  
dispose of the Software, on a temporary or permanent basis  
without the prior written consent of Licensor.  
236  
   
4.2.2 already in your possession, provided that Licensee can  
show such possession from written records (other than as a  
result of a breach of this clause 4); or  
3. OWNERSHIP OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY  
RIGHTS  
3.1 Your only right to use the Software is by virtue of this  
License and you acknowledge that all intellectual property  
rights in or relating to the Software and all parts of the  
Software are and shall remain the exclusive property of  
Licensor or its licensors.  
4.2.3 which you can demonstrate is in the public domain  
(other than as a result of a breach of this clause 4).  
4.3 To the extent that any information is necessarily  
disclosed pursuant to a statutory or regulatory obligation or  
court order, such disclosure shall not be a breach of this  
clause 4 provided you do what you can to prevent any such  
disclosure.  
3.2 You agree that you will not remove or alter any copyright  
notices or similar proprietary devices, including without  
limitation any electronic watermarks or other identifiers, that  
may be incorporated in the Software or any copy of the  
Software.  
5. WARRANTY AND SUPPORT  
The Software is provided "as is" with no representation,  
guarantee or warranty of any kind as to its functionality or  
that it does not and will not infringe any third party rights  
(including intellectual property rights). Licensor has no  
obligation under this License to provide technical or other  
support to you.  
4. CONFIDENTIALITY  
4.1 The structure, organisation and source code of the  
Software are the valuable trade secrets and proprietary  
confidential information of Licensor and its licensors. You  
agree not to provide or disclose any such confidential  
information in the Software or derived from it to any third  
party.  
6. LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY  
6.1 Licensor does not exclude its liability (if any) to you:  
4.2 The provisions of clause 4.1 will not apply to any  
information which is:  
6.1.1 for personal injury or death resulting from Licensor's  
negligence;  
4.2.1 lawfully obtained free of any duty of confidentiality  
(otherwise than directly or indirectly from Licensor); or  
6.1.2 for fraud; or  
Warranty Information  
237  
6.1.3 for any matter for which it would be illegal for Licensor  
to exclude or to attempt to exclude its liability.  
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF SAVINGS,  
DEPLETION OF GOODWILL AND LIKE LOSS) HOWSOEVER  
CAUSED ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH:  
6.2 LICENSOR MAKES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES WITH  
RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND LICENSOR HEREBY  
EXCLUDES (TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE IN LAW),  
ALL CONDITIONS, WARRANTIES (INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL  
MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL  
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE) AND STIPULATIONS,  
EXPRESS (OTHER THAN THOSE SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE)  
OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY, CUSTOMARY OR OTHERWISE  
WHICH, BUT FOR SUCH EXCLUSION, WOULD OR MIGHT  
SUBSIST IN FAVOUR OF YOU. EXCEPT AS SET OUT IN THIS  
LICENSE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY  
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE.  
6.3.1 THE SOFTWARE, OR THE MANUFACTURE OR SALE OR  
SUPPLY, OR FAILURE OR DELAY IN SUPPLY, OF THE  
SOFTWARE BY LICENSOR OR ON THE PART OF LICENSOR'S  
EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUB-CONTRACTORS;  
6.3.2 ANY BREACH BY LICENSOR OF ANY OF THE EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED TERMS OF THIS LICENSE;  
6.3.3 ANY USE MADE OF THE SOFTWARE; OR  
6.3.4 ANY STATEMENT MADE OR NOT MADE, OR ADVICE  
GIVEN OR NOT GIVEN, BY OR ON BEHALF OF LICENSOR.  
6.4 Disclaimer of Certain Damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
SAMSUNG BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY PARTY RELATED TO  
YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST  
PROFITS, EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION WILL  
APPLY REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER  
FRAUD, MISREPRESENTATION, BREACH OF CONTRACT,  
NEGILIGENCE, PERSONAL INJURY, PRODUCTS LIABILITY,  
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT, OR ANY OTHER  
THEORY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SAMSUNG HAS  
6.3 SUBJECT TO CLAUSE 6.1 LICENSOR WILL BE UNDER NO  
LIABILITY TO YOU WHATSOEVER (WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), BREACH OF STATUTORY  
DUTY, RESTITUTION OR OTHERWISE) FOR ANY INJURY,  
DEATH, DAMAGE OR DIRECT, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
LOSS (ALL THREE OF WHICH TERMS INCLUDE, WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, PURE ECONOMIC LOSS, LOSS OF PROFITS,  
238  
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
THIS MEANS THAT YOU WILL NOT SEEK, AND HEREBY  
WAIVE, ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, TREBLE,  
OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES FROM SAMSUNG. THIS LIMITATION  
AND WAIVER ALSO APPLIES TO ANY CLAIMS YOU MAY BRING  
AGAINST ANY OTHER PARTY TO THE EXTENT THAT SAMSUNG  
WOULD BE REQUIRED TO INDEMNIFY THAT PARTY FOR SUCH  
CLAIM.  
7.3 Upon termination of this License for any reason  
whatsoever Licensor retains the right to permanently disable  
your access to the Software.  
7.4 The termination of this License howsoever arising is  
without prejudice to the rights, duties and liabilities of either  
party accrued prior to termination. Clauses 2.2, 2.3, 3, 4, 5,  
6, 7.3, 8, 9 and 10 of this License will continue to be  
enforceable notwithstanding termination.  
6.5 You acknowledge that the above provisions of this clause  
6 are reasonable for the Software and you will accept such  
risk and/or insure accordingly.  
8. GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION  
8.1 The formation, existence, construction, performance,  
validity and all aspects whatsoever of this License or of any  
term of this License will be governed by the laws of the State  
of New York.  
6.6 Any rights that you have as a consumer are not affected  
by this clause 6.  
7. TERM AND TERMINATION  
8.2 The courts in New York City will have non-exclusive  
jurisdiction to settle any disputes which may arise out of or in  
connection with this License. The parties irrevocably agree to  
submit to that jurisdiction.  
7.1 This License shall commence upon the earlier of your  
acceptance of this License or your activation of the Software  
and shall continue until terminated in accordance with clause  
7.2 or otherwise in accordance with this License.  
9. COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAW  
7.2 This License will terminate automatically if you fail to  
comply with any term or condition of this License or if you  
cease to use the Software for any reason.  
You acknowledge and agree that notwithstanding the fact  
that this License is governed by the laws of the Republic of  
Korea, you may be subject to additional laws in other  
jurisdictions with respect to your use of the Software. You  
Warranty Information  
239  
will comply with the laws of any jurisdiction that apply to the  
Software, including without limitation any applicable export  
laws or regulations.  
10.5 Licensor reserves the right to revise the terms of this  
License by updating the License on its web site, or by  
notifying you by post or by e-mail. You are advised to check  
the Licensor's website periodically for notices concerning  
revisions. Your continued use of the Software shall be  
deemed to constitute acceptance of any revised terms.  
10.GENERAL  
10.1 If any clause or part of this License is found by any  
court, tribunal, administrative body or authority of competent  
jurisdiction to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable then that  
provision will, to the extent required, be severed from this  
License and will be ineffective without, as far as is possible,  
modifying any other clause or part of this License and this  
will not affect any other provisions of this License which will  
remain in full force and effect.  
10.6 You will be deemed to have accepted the terms of this  
License by using the Software on any device.  
10.2 No failure or delay by any party to exercise any right,  
power or remedy will operate as a waiver of it nor will any  
partial exercise preclude any further exercise of the same, or  
of some other right, power or remedy.  
10.3 The parties to this License do not intend that any of its  
terms will be enforceable by any person not a party to it.  
10.4 This License contains all the terms which the parties  
have agreed in relation to the subject matter of this License  
and supersedes any prior written or oral agreements,  
representations or understandings between the parties in  
relation to such subject matter.  
240  
Section 13: Samsung Product Registration  
Sign Up Now  
Customize your Samsung device experience  
• Activate product warranty  
• Access to a personalized My Samsung Mobile account  
• No monthly fees  
Get More  
• Latest info on promotions, events and special offers on related products  
• Review Samsung products and share your opinion  
• Great deals on downloads  
Register now at  
www.samsung.com/register  
Scan this code to go  
directly to the registration page.  
Samsung Product Registration  
241  
 
Index  
Using Contacts List 65  
Address Book Options 68  
Airplane mode 110, 114  
Alarm 165  
Amazon Kindle 159  
Android System Recovery 16  
Applications  
Using the Camcorder 90  
Using the Camera 84  
World Clock 166  
Applications settings  
allow mock locations 138  
managing 123  
running services 123  
stay awake 138  
USB debugging 138  
AT&T Code Scanner 159  
AT&T GPS  
Navigator 161  
AT&T Music  
Playlists 78  
AT&T Navigator 161  
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 152  
B
Back key 33  
Battery  
charging 9  
A
Abc mode 58  
About Phone 139  
Accounts and Synchronization set-  
tings 123  
Adding a New Contact  
Idle Screen 62  
Installing 8  
Low Battery Indicator 11  
Battery Use & Safety 197  
Bluetooth  
Sending contacts 155  
Browser  
Power Saving 143  
Setting Brightness 143  
Setting Color Saturation 143  
C
Calculator 163  
Address Book 62  
Adding a New Contact 62  
Adding Pauses to Contact  
Numbers 64  
Copying an entry to the Phone 72  
Copying Entry to Phone 72  
Copying Entry to SIM Card 72  
Deleting Address Book Entries 73  
Dialing a Number 65  
Favorites 71  
Calendar 163  
Finding an Address Book Entry 65  
Group Settings 70  
Managing Address Book Entries  
Call Functions 46  
3-WayCalling(Multi-PartyCalling)  
Address Book 48  
Adjusting the Call Volume 52  
Service Dialing Numbers 73  
242  
 
Answering a Call 48  
Call Back Missed Call 50  
Call Duration 52  
Camcorder Options  
Camcorder Options after a Video is  
Taken 93  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
Downloads 168  
Call Log 49  
Call Waiting 56  
Camera 84  
E
Email 103  
Creating Additional Email  
Accounts 104  
Switching Between Email  
Accounts 104  
Synchronizing a Corporate Email  
Account 103  
Accessing the Pictures Folder 89  
Camera Options 86, 91  
Picture Folder 89  
Taking Pictures 84  
Care and Maintenance 203  
Changing Your Settings 108  
Charging battery 9  
Children and Cell Phones 193  
Clock 165  
Code Scanner 159  
Contacts 62  
Cookies  
Emptying 146  
Creating a Playlist 78  
Correcting the Number 47  
Dialing a Recent Number 47  
Ending a Call 47  
International Call 46  
Making a Call 46  
Manual Pause Dialing 46  
Options During a Call 52  
Putting a Call on Hold 53  
Saving the Missed Call Number to  
Address Book 50  
Searching for a Number in  
Address Book 56  
Using the Speakerphone 55  
Viewing All Calls 50  
Viewing Missed Calls 50  
Camcorder 90  
Accessing the Video Folder 93  
Camcorder Options 91  
Shooting Video 91  
Emergency Calls 202  
Entering Text 57  
Changing the Text Entry Mode 57,  
Using 123Sym Mode 57, 59  
Using Abc Mode 58  
Using Android Keyboard 60  
Using Swype 60  
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 59  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals 189  
D
Developer Options 138  
Diary 174  
Display  
icons 22  
F
Display / Touch-Screen 201  
Facebook 169  
243  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices 208  
FCC Notice and Cautions 210  
G
Gallery 82  
viewing pictures 83  
viewing videos 83  
Getting Started 6  
Setting Up Your Phone 6  
Voice mail 14  
Hotspot Guru 152  
Hotspots 152  
L
Landscape 57  
I
Language and keyboard settings  
select locale 129  
Icons  
Application 26  
Indicator 22  
Icons, description 22  
In-Call Options 52  
Incognito 144  
Create Window 144  
Exit Window 144  
International Call 46  
Internet 142  
Latitude 170  
Live TV 80  
Location services settings 124  
M
Maps 171  
Media Hub 29, 74  
Gmail 104  
Memo 173  
Google Maps 171  
Google Search Bar 33  
Google Voice Typing 61  
GPS & AGPS 201  
Group  
Adding an Entry 70  
Editing 71  
Removing an Entry 70  
Group Settings  
Memory Card 44  
Memory Card Installation 7  
Menu  
J
Joining Contacts 66  
key 33  
Menu Navigation 33  
Message Options 98  
Message Search 101  
Messaging  
Creating and Sending Text  
Messages 97  
K
Keyboard Settings 129  
Android keyboard 129  
Samsung keypad 131  
Swype 133  
Keypad  
Changing Text Input 58  
Kindle 159  
Editing a Caller Group 71  
H
Deleting a message 101  
Gmail 104  
Health and Safety Information 189  
Home key 33  
Options 98  
244  
Settings 102  
Signing into Email 103  
Signing into Gmail 105  
Types of Messages 97  
MicroSD Card 7  
microSD card 44  
Installing 7  
MP3 76  
MP4 76  
WMA 76  
Other Important Safety Information  
P
PC Connections 156  
Phone  
Front View 19  
icons 22  
Rear View 21  
Side View 20  
Switching On/Off 11  
Pictures 82  
Gallery 82  
Music Player 76  
adding music 79  
creating a playlist 78  
removing music 79  
Mute 53, 56  
My files 176  
myAT&T 176  
N
Navigation 177  
command keys 33  
context-sensitive menus 34  
terms used 34  
touch gestures 34  
Navigation Options 177  
Navigator 161  
News 179  
News & Weather 179  
NFC 157  
Removing 8  
microSDHC card 7, 44  
Mini Diary 174  
Mobile Web 142  
Entering Text in the Mobile Web  
Browser 143  
Navigating with the Mobile Web  
Using Bookmarks 145  
Motion 137  
Multimedia 74  
Music File Extensions  
3GP 76  
AAC 76  
AAC+ 76  
Places 180  
Play Books 180  
Play Movies 180  
Play Music 181  
Play Store 181  
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot 111  
Powering  
Off 11  
Predictive text 59  
Privacy settings  
factory data reset 135  
Noise reduction 53  
eAAC+ 76  
M4A 76  
O
Operating Environment 206  
245  
device administration 127  
trusted credentials 128  
Service Dialing Numbers 73  
Settings 108  
Shortcuts 22  
Show Corrections 60  
SIM card  
installation 7  
Installing 6  
Smart Practices While Driving 196  
Smart Wi-Fi 152  
Snooze 166  
Social Hub 182, 223  
Software Update 140  
Speakerphone Key 55  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certi-  
fication Information 194  
Standard Limited Warranty 213  
Stopwatch 167  
Storage 121  
Swap 54  
Swype  
entering text using 60  
Preferences 61  
Symbol/Numeric mode 57, 59  
Synchronization settings  
auto-sync 124  
System Recovery 16  
T
Task 183  
Task manager 184  
Tethering 111  
Text Input  
Abc mode 58  
Methods 57  
numeric mode 57, 59  
symbol mode 57, 59  
Timer 167  
Touch Screen 11  
Lock/Unlock 11  
Travel Charger 9  
Using 10  
Q
Qik Lite 81  
Quickoffice 182  
QWERTY keypad 57  
R
Ready2Go 12  
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 192  
Reject List 52  
Reject list 52  
Reset  
factory data 135  
Responsible Listening 204  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 210  
S
Safe Mode 17  
TTY Mode 116  
Samsung Mobile Products and Recy-  
cling 199  
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 200  
Understanding Your Phone 18  
Features of Your Phone 18  
Front View 19  
SD Card 44  
Search Bar 33  
Security settings  
246  
Rear View 21  
Accessing 14  
YP (Yellow Pages mobile) 187  
Side Views 20  
Volume 118  
USB connection modes 156  
USB connections  
as a mass storage device 156  
USB settings  
W
Warranty Information 213  
Weather 179  
Web 142  
as a mass storage device 156  
mass storage device 156  
USB Tethering 111  
USB utilities 110  
Widgets  
Calculator 27  
Calendar 27  
Camera 27  
Using Favorites  
Gmail 28, 169  
Adding Favorites 144  
Deleting a Favorite 146  
Editing Favorites 145  
V
Video Chat 81  
Memo 29  
Settings 31, 182  
Video Player 32  
Voice Recorder 32, 185  
YouTube 32  
Video player 82  
Visual Voicemail 14  
Setup 14  
Wi-Fi 149  
Wi-Fi Direct 113, 151  
World Clock  
Voice Mail  
Deleting an Entry 167  
World clock 166  
Y
Yellowpages 187  
YouTube 186  
From Another Phone 16  
Voice Recorder 185  
Voice Talk 186  
Voicemail  
247  

Toshiba Protege PT311U09Q07E User Manual
Sony DREAM MACHINE ICFC218WHITE User Manual
Seagate SAVVIO10K4 SAS ST9600104SS User Manual
Seagate MOMENTUS ST980310ASG User Manual
Seagate MOMENTUS ST160LT003 User Manual
Seagate Cheetah ST3450857FC User Manual
Seagate BARRACUDA ATA FAMILY ST313620A User Manual
Samsung SGH X497 User Manual
Philips HD 5400 User Manual
Onkyo C 7000R User Manual